HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series Printers
User Guide
CP6015n
CP6015dn
CP6015de
CP6015x
CP6015xh
HP Color LaserJet CP6015
User Guide
Copyright and License
Trademark Credits
Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
© 2008 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
Corel® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel
Corporation Limited.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows®XP
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Windows Vista™ is either a registered
trademark or trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
PANTONE® is Pantone, Inc's check-
standard trademark for color.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open
Group.
Part number: Q3931-90968
Edition 1, 04/2008
ENERGY STAR® is a U.S. registered mark
of the United States Environmental
Protection Agency.
Table of contents
HP Color LaserJet CP6015n, HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn, and HP Color
2 Control panel
ENWW
iii
3 Software for Windows
4 Use the product with Macintosh
Print on both sides of the page (duplex printing) ............................................... 67
iv
ENWW
6 Network configuration
Benefits of a network connection ....................................................................................................... 76
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) ............................................................... 78
Subnet mask ..................................................................................... 79
7 Paper and print media
Load paper and print media ............................................................................................................... 92
Print envelopes ................................................................................................. 93
Load custom-size paper into Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 .................................................. 96
ENWW
v
8 Use product features
vi
ENWW
9 Print tasks
10 Use color
ENWW
vii
11 Manage and maintain the product
viii
ENWW
Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection using Microsoft
12 Solve problems
ENWW
ix
Appendix A Supplies and accessories
Order directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are connected to a
x
ENWW
Priority onsite service .......................................................................................................265
Appendix C Product specifications
Appendix D Regulatory information
Single returns ................................................................................. 276
ENWW
xi
xii
ENWW
Product comparison
Table 1-1 Product models
Model
Features
100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)
HP Color LaserJet CP6015n
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
500-sheet input tray (Tray 2)
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network
512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)
100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)
500-sheet input tray (Tray 2)
HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network
512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)
Duplexer
HP Color LaserJet CP6015de
100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)
500-sheet input tray (Trays 2)
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network
512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)
Duplexer
Meets ENERGY STAR® guidelines, Version 1.0
100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)
Two 500-sheet input trays (Trays 2 and 3)
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network
512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)
Duplexer
HP Color LaserJet CP6015x
HP Color LaserJet CP6015xh
100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)
Four 500-sheet input trays (Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5)
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network
512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)
Duplexer
●
●
●
●
●
●
40 gigabyte (GB) hard drive.
2
Chapter 1 Product basics
ENWW
Product features
Table 1-2 Features
Speed and throughput
Print up to 40 pages per minute (ppm) on letter-size paper and 41 ppm on A4-size
paper.
●
Less than 11 seconds to print the first page
Recommended maximum monthly print volume of 4,000 to 17,000 pages
A 835 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor
Banner printing
●
●
●
●
●
●
Duplex at speed
Resolution
Memory
600 dots per inch (dpi) with Image Resolution Enhancement technology 4800 for
optimum overall imaging
1200 x 600 dpi for detailed line work and small text
●
512 MB of random-access memory (RAM)
●
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) automatically compresses data to use
RAM more efficiently.
●
User interface
Four-line graphical display on the control panel
●
●
An embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for
network-connected products)
HP Easy Printer Care software (a Web-based status and troubleshooting tool)
●
●
Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through HP Easy Printer Care
software and embedded Web server
Paper-handling
Input
●
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies,
labels, banner media, envelopes, and other paper types. See Supported paper
types on page 89 for a list of paper types. The tray holds up to 100 sheets
of paper, 50 transparencies, or 10 envelopes. See Supported paper and print
media sizes on page 85.
◦
common paper sizes and allow printing on custom-size paper. Tray 2 supports
up to 279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 inches) and A3 paper sizes, and Trays 3, 4, and
5 support sizes up to 305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 inches), and SRA3. See
Supported paper and print media sizes on page 85 for a list of supported
paper sizes. For a list of supported paper types, see Supported paper types
on page 89.
◦
Duplex printing: Provides automatic two-sided printing (printing on both sides
of the paper). Not available on the HP Color LaserJet CP6015n model. This
model cannot be upgraded to auto duplex.
◦
ENWW
Product features
3
Table 1-2 Features (continued)
The paper size range for automatic duplex printing is 175 mm to 320 mm (6.9
to 12.6 inches) x 210 mm to 457 mm (8.3 to 18 inches). The media weight
range is 60–220 g/m2 (16-58 lb).
Output
●
Standard output bin: The standard output bin is located on the top of the
product. This bin can hold up to 500 sheets of paper. The product has a sensor
that indicates when the bin is full.
◦
Optional 3-bin stapler/stacker: Provides job separation in multiple output
bins, convenient stapling (up to 50-sheet jobs), job offset capability, and
additional output capacity. The stacker has three bins: a 100-sheet bin, a 500-
sheet bin, and a 1000-sheet bin.
◦
Optional booklet maker finisher: Provides convenient stapling (up to 50-
sheet jobs), saddle-stitching (up to 15-sheet booklets), single-sheet v-folding,
job separation and offset capability, as well as additional output capacity. The
booklet maker finisher has three bins: two 1000-sheet bins and one bin that
can hold up to 25 saddle-stitched booklets.
◦
NOTE: The output bin capacities are based on 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. Heavier
paper decreases the capacity.
Languages and fonts
HP Printer Control Language (PCL) 6
HP Universal Printer Driver (UPD) PCL 5
HP UPD postscript (PS)
●
●
●
●
●
Printer Management Language
93 internal TrueType fonts scalable in HP PCL drivers. 93 internal scalable fonts in
HP Postscript level 3 emulation (Euro symbols built in). Additional font solutions
available via third-party flash memory products.
Print cartridges/image drums (4
of each)
Two-part toner/imaging system
●
●
Black print cartridges print up to 16,500 pages; Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow print
cartridges print up to 21,000 pages each.
Image drums print up to 35,000 pages at 5% coverage
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Authentic HP print cartridge detection
Automatic toner strip remover
Microsoft® Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, and Windows Vista™
Supported operating systems
Macintosh OS X, V10.2.8 , V10.3, V10.4, V10.5, and later
Novell NetWare
Unix®
Linux
Connectivity
Local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45) for the embedded HP Jetdirect print
server
Two enhanced input/output (EIO) slots
USB 2.0 connection
●
●
4
Chapter 1 Product basics
ENWW
Product walkaround
Front view
HP Color LaserJet CP6015n, HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn, and HP Color LaserJet
CP6015de
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
8
7
1
Control-panel display
Output bin (holds approximately 500 sheets of paper)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Duplex switchback tray (HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn and HP Color LaserJet CP6015de only)
Right door (provides access for clearing paper jams and replacing parts)
Tray 1 (100-sheet multi-purpose tray)
Power connection
On/Off switch
Tray 2 (500-sheet input tray)
Front cover (provides access to the print cartridges and image drums)
6
Chapter 1 Product basics
ENWW
Interface ports
The product has up to 4 ports (2 standard) for connecting to a computer or a network. The ports are at
the left, rear corner of the product.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Two EIO interface expansion slots
Access port for Kensington lock
USB 2.0 port
Network connection (embedded HP Jetdirect print server)
Serial number and model number location
The model number and serial number are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the product.
The serial number contains information about the country/region of origin, the product version,
production code, and the production number of the product.
Figure 1-1 Sample model and serial number label
Model name
Model number
Q3931A
HP Color LaserJet CP6015n
HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn
HP Color LaserJet CP6015de
HP Color LaserJet CP6015x
HP Color LaserJet CP6015xh
Q3932A
Q3935A
Q3933A
Q3934A
ENWW
Product walkaround
9
10 Chapter 1 Product basics
ENWW
Use the control panel
The control panel has a text display that provides access to all product functions. Use the buttons and
numeric keypad to control jobs and the product status. The lights indicate overall product status.
Control-panel layout
The control panel includes a text display, job-control buttons, a numeric keypad, and three light-emitting
diode (LED) status lights.
1
2
3
4 5 6 7
12 11 10
9
8
1
Stop button
Halts the current job, presents a choice to resume or cancel the current job,
clears paper from the product, and clears any continuable errors that are
associated with the halted job. If the product is not printing a job, pressing
Stop pauses the product.
2
3
4
Menu button
Display
Opens and closes menus.
Shows status information, menus, help information, and error messages.
Navigates backward in nested menus.
Back arrow ( ) button
Up arrow ( ) button
5
6
7
Navigates menus and text, and increases the values of numerical items in
the display.
Checkmark (
) button
Makes selections, resumes printing after continuable errors, and overrides
a non-HP print cartridge.
Down arrow ( ) button
Navigates menus and text, and decreases the values of numerical items in
the display.
8
Numeric keypad
Help ( ) button
Attention light
Allows you to type numeric values for PINs and other numeric values.
Provides detailed information about product messages or menus.
9
10
The Attention light indicates that the product has a condition that requires
intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message
on the display.
11
12
Data light
The Data light indicates that the product is receiving data.
Ready light
The Ready light indicates that the product is ready to begin processing any
job.
12 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Interpreting control panel indicator lights
Indicator
On
Off
Flashing
Ready
(green)
Data
Product is online (able to
accept and process data).
Product is offline or is turned Product is attempting to stop
off.
printing and go offline.
Processed data is present in Product is not processing or
the product, but more data is receiving data.
needed to complete the job.
Product is processing and
receiving data.
(green)
Attention
(amber)
A critical error has occurred.
Product requires attention.
No conditions exist that
require attention.
An error has occurred.
Product requires attention.
ENWW
Use the control panel 13
Control panel menus
You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer through the printer driver or software
application. This is the most convenient way to control the product, and will override the product control-
panel settings. See the help files associated with the software, or for more information on accessing the
You can also control the product by changing settings in the product’s control panel. Use the control
panel to access features not supported by the printer driver or software application, and to configure
trays for paper size and type.
Getting started basics
Enter the menus by pressing the Menu button.
●
●
●
Select a menu item by using the checkmark button
.
Use the up or down arrows
to navigate through the menus. In addition to menu navigation, the
up and down arrows can increase and decrease numerical value selections. Hold down the up or
down arrows to scroll faster.
The back button allows you to move back in menu selections as well as select numerical values
when configuring the product.
●
Exit all menus by pressing Menu.
●
●
If no key is pressed for 60 seconds, the product returns to the Ready state.
14 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Menu hierarchy
The following tables list the hierarchies of each menu.
Open the menus
Press Menu.
Press the up arrow or down arrow button to navigate the listings.
Press the checkmark button to select the appropriate option.
The following top-level menus are available:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
ENWW
Menu hierarchy 15
Retrieve job menu
The RETRIEVE JOB menu allows you to view listings of all stored jobs.
To display: Press Menu, and then select RETRIEVE JOB.
Item
Sub-item
Options
Description
USER <X>
Each user who has stored jobs is
listed by name. Select the
appropriate user name to see a list of
stored jobs.
ALL PRIVATE JOBS
<JOB NAME>
This message is displayed if a user
has stored jobs that require a PIN.
Each job is listed by name.
PRINT
Select this option to print a stored job.
When printing a private job, the user
is prompted to enter a PIN.
COPIES
DELETE
The number of copies of the job to be
printed. The default is 1.
Select this option to delete a stored
job. When deleting a private job, the
user is prompted to enter a PIN.
ENWW
Retrieve job menu 17
Information menu
Use the INFORMATION menu to access and print specific product information.
To display: press Menu, and then select INFORMATION.
Item
Description
PRINT MENU MAP
Prints the control-panel menu map, which shows the layout and current
settings of the control-panel menu items.
PRINT CONFIGURATION
Prints the product configuration pages, which show the printer settings and
installed accessories.
PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE
Prints the estimated remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on total
number of pages and jobs processed, serial number, page counts, and
maintenance information.
SUPPLIES STATUS
PRINT USAGE PAGE
Displays the status of the print cartridges, image drums, fuser kit, roller kit,
and transfer kit in a scrollable list.
Prints a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product; lists
whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the
page count.
PRINT COLOR USAGE JOB LOG
PRINT DEMO
Prints the color-use statistics for the printer.
Prints a demonstration page.
PRINT RGB SAMPLES
Prints color samples for different RGB values. Use the samples as a guide
for matching printed colors.
PRINT CMYK SAMPLES
Prints color samples for different CMYK values. Use the samples as a guide
for matching printed colors.
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY
PRINT PCL FONT LIST
PRINT PS FONT LIST
Prints the name and directory of files stored in the product.
Prints the available PCL fonts.
Prints the available PS fonts.
18 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Paper handling menu
Use this menu to configure input trays by size and type. It is important to correctly configure the trays
with this menu before you print for the first time.
To display: Press Menu, and then select PAPER HANDLING.
NOTE: If you have used other HP LaserJet product models, you might be accustomed to configuring
Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series printers, setting Tray 1
to ANY SIZE and ANY TYPE is equivalent to First mode. Setting Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY
SIZE or ANY TYPE is equivalent to Cassette mode.
Menu item
Value
Description
TRAY 1 SIZE
A list of available sizes appears.
Allows you to configure the paper size for
Tray 1. The default is ANY SIZE. See
on page 85 for a complete list of available
sizes.
TRAY 1 TYPE
A list of available types appears.
A list of available sizes appears.
Allows you to configure the paper type for
Tray 1. The default is ANY TYPE. See
complete list of available types.
TRAY X SIZE
Allows you to configure the paper size for
Tray 2 or optional Trays 3, 4, or 5. The
default size is LETTER or A4, depending on
your country/region. The paper size is
detected by the guides in the tray. See
on page 85 for a complete list of available
sizes.
X = 2 or optional 3, 4, or 5
TRAY X TYPE
A list of available types appears.
Allows you to configure the paper type for
Tray 2 or optional Trays 3, 4, or 5. The
types on page 89 for a complete list of
available types.
X = 2 or optional 3, 4, or 5
ENWW
Paper handling menu 19
Configure device menu
The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu allows you to change the default printing settings, adjust the print
quality, change the system configuration and I/O options, and reset the default settings.
Printing menu
These settings affect only jobs without identified properties. Most jobs identify all of the properties and
override the values set from this menu.
To display: Press Menu, select CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then select PRINTING.
Menu item
COPIES
Values
Description
Range: 1 - 32000
Allows you to set the default number of
copies for print jobs. The default number is
1.
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE
A list of available sizes appears.
Allows you to set the default paper size.
DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE
Allows you to set the default size for any
custom print job. The default unit of
measure is MILLIMETERS.
UNIT OF MEASURE
X DIMENSION
●
●
●
Y DIMENSION
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER
MANUAL FEED
NO
Allows you to set the product to print an A4
job on letter-size paper when no A4 paper
is loaded. The default is YES.
YES
OFF
ON
The default is OFF. Setting it to ON makes
MANUAL FEED the default for jobs that do
not select a tray. You can override this
setting in the printer driver.
COURIER FONT
WIDE A4
REGULAR
DARK
NO
Allows you to select a version of the Courier
font. The default is REGULAR.
Allows you to change the printable area of
A4 paper so that eighty 10-pitch characters
may be printed on a single line. The default
is NO.
YES
PRINT PS ERRORS
PRINT PDF ERRORS
OFF
ON
Allows you to select to print PS error pages.
The default is OFF.
OFF
ON
Allows you to select to print PDF error
pages. The default is OFF.
PCL sub-menu
This menu configures settings for the printer control language.
To display: Press Menu, select CONFIGURE DEVICE, select PRINTING, and then select PCL
SUBMENU.
20 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Item
Description
FORM LENGTH
ORIENTATION
FONT SOURCE
FONT NUMBER
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size.
Allows you to select default page orientation to portrait or landscape.
Selects the font source.
The product assigns a number to each font and lists the numbers on the PCL font
list. The range is 0 to 999.
FONT PITCH
SYMBOL SET
Selects the font pitch. This item might not appear, depending on the font selected.
The range is 0.44 to 99.99.
Selects any one of several available symbol sets at the product control panel. A
symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is
recommended for line-draw characters.
APPEND CR TO LF
Select YES to append a carriage return to each line-feed that is encountered in
backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Some environments
indicate a new line by only the line-feed control code. Use this option to append
the required carriage return to each line feed.
SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES
MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING
When generating your own PCL, extra form feeds are included that would cause
a blank page to be printed. Select YES for form feeds to be ignored if the page is
blank.
The PCL5 MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING command selects an input tray by a
number that maps to the various available trays and feeders.
ENWW
Configure device menu 21
Print Quality menu
To display: Press Menu, select CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then select PRINT QUALITY.
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
ADJUST COLOR
HIGHLIGHTS
Range from +5 to –5.
Default is 0.
Adjust the darkness or lightness of highlights on a
printed page. Lower values represent lighter
highlights on a printed page, and higher values
represent darker highlights on a printed page.
CYAN DENSITY
●
●
●
●
MAGNETA DENSITY
YELLOW DENSITY
BLACK DENSITY
MIDTONES
Range from +5 to –5.
Default is 0.
Adjust the darkness or lightness of midtones on a
printed page. Lower values represent lighter
midtones on a printed page, and higher values
represent darker midtones on a printed page.
CYAN DENSITY
●
●
●
●
MAGNETA DENSITY
YELLOW DENSITY
BLACK DENSITY
SHADOWS
Range from +5 to –5.
Default is 0.
Adjust the darkness or lightness of shadows on a
printed page. Lower values represent lighter
shadows on a printed page, and higher values
represent darker shadows on a printed page.
CYAN DENSITY
●
●
●
●
MAGNETA DENSITY
YELLOW DENSITY
BLACK DENSITY
RESTORE COLOR VALUES
Restore the color settings by resetting the density
values of each color.
SET REGISTRATION
Setting the registration shifts the margin alignment
to center the image on the page from top to bottom
and from left to right. You can also align the image
on the front with the image printed on the back.
PRINT TEST PAGE
SOURCE
Print a test page for setting the registration.
ALL TRAYS
TRAY 1
Select the source input tray for printing the SET
REGISTRATION test page.
TRAY 2
TRAY <X> (X = 3, 4, or
5)
ADJUST TRAY <X>
Shift from -20 to 20
along the X or Y axes.
0 is the default.
Perform the alignment procedure for each tray.
X1 SHIFT
X2 SHIFT
Y SHIFT
When it creates an image, the product scans
across the page from side to side as the sheet
feeds from top to bottom into the product.
●
●
●
The scan direction is referred to as X. X1 is the
scan direction for the first side of a 2-sided page.
X2 is the scan direction for the second side of a 2-
sided page. The feed direction is referred to as Y.
22 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
AUTO SENSE MODE
TRAY 1 SENSING
FULL SENSING
EXPANDED SENSING
Sets the sensing option for Tray 1 for paper types
using AUTO SENSE mode.
When FULL SENSING is selected, the product
recognizes plain paper, heavy paper, glossy
paper, tough paper, and transparencies.
TRANSPARENCY
ONLY
When EXPANDED SENSING is selected, the
product recognizes plain paper, heavy paper,
glossy paper, tough paper, and transparencies. It
senses the first page only other than
transparencies for which is senses every page, All
trays (1–5) have this capability.
When TRANSPARENCY ONLY is selected, the
product recognizes only overhead transparency
and non-overhead transparency types.
TRAY <X> SENSING
FULL SENSING
Sets the sensing option for Tray 2 and optional
Trays 3, 4, and 5 for paper types using AUTO
SENSE mode.
EXPANDED SENSING
TRANSPARENCY
ONLY
When EXPANDED SENSING is selected, the
product recognizes plain paper, glossy paper,
tough paper, and transparencies,
When TRANSPARENCY ONLY is selected, the
product recognizes only overhead transparency
and non-overhead transparency types.
ADJUST PAPER TYPES
Sometimes you may need to adjust the product for
a particular paper type or environment in order to
improve print quality.
<TYPE> — List of
●
paper types
To override the factory-default print-mode settings
for a specific paper type, select it and apply any of
the three adjustments described below.
In addition, you can map non-HP media types to a
different print mode, although this is not
recommended.
BEST GLOSS MODE
RESISTANCE MODE
OFF (default)
Turn this setting ON to maintain stable gloss mode
performance. This setting decreases the print
speed.
ON
NORMAL (default)
NORMAL is the default setting.
UP
The UP setting raises the secondary transfer bias.
Use this setting if you are seeing faded images or
scattered toner on certain paper types. These
problems might be worse on the second side of a
printed duplex page. These problems occur more
often in high-temperature and high-humidity
environments, or with coated paper.
DOWN
Use the DOWN setting if you are using light weight
or thin media in a low-temperature and low-
humidity environment and you are experiencing
highly mottled, distorted, or grainy images, or
images with toner missing. This setting reduces
the secondary transfer bias.
ENWW
Configure device menu 23
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
DISCHARGE MODE
NORMAL (default)
Select ON if you are seeing clumps of toner or
toner spatter on print jobs. These problems can
occur in low-temperature and low-humidity
environments, with lightweight or thin paper. The
problems might happen more frequently with
duplex jobs.
ON
PRINT MODES
AUTO SENSE MODE Allows you to change the print mode for non-HP
(default)
paper types, which can affect print quality.
NORMAL
When AUTO SENSE MODE is enabled, the
product media sensor picks the best print mode.
TRANSPARENCY
MODE
<ADDITIONAL PRINT
MODES>
RESTORE MODES
OPTIMIZE
Use this feature to return all paper type-mode
settings to the factory-default settings.
PAPER CURL
NORMAL (default)
To help reduce paper curl, set this option to
REDUCED. This decreases full speed to 10 PPM
(instead of 40 ppm) and 3/4 speed to 7.5 ppm
(instead of 30 ppm).
REDUCED
PRE-ROTATION
FUSER TEMP
OFF (default)
ON
Set this feature to ON if horizontal streaks appear
on pages. Using this feature increases the warm-
up time for the product.
NORMAL (default)
ALTERNATE 1
ALTERNATE 2
ALTERNATE 3
Reduces the temperature of the fuser to prevent a
hot offset.
If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated
at the bottom of the page or on the following page,
you should first make sure the Paper Type and
Print Mode settings are correct for the type of
paper you are using. If you continue to see ghost
images on your print jobs, set the Fuser Temp
feature to one of the Alternate settings. Try the
Alternate 1 setting first and see if it solves the
problem. If you continue to see the problem, try
Alternate 2 and then Alternate 3. With the Alternate
2 and Alternate 3 settings you may see an extra
delay between jobs.
TRAY 1
NORMAL (default)
If you are seeing marks on the back side of the
paper when printing from Tray 1, set the mode to
ALTERNATE. This increases the frequency of the
cleaning cycle.
ALTERNATE
GLOSS MODE
NORMAL (default)
Chosen when stable high gloss is required.
HIGH
Set this feature to HIGH for glossy print jobs, such
as photos, if you notice the gloss finish decreasing
after the first page is printed. This setting reduces
the performance for all paper types.
LIGHT MEDIA
AUTO (default)
Prevents the fuser from wrapping with lightweight
paper.
ON
Set this feature to ON if you are frequently seeing
Fuser Delay Jam or Fuser Wrap Jam messages,
24 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
especially when printing on lightweight paper or on
jobs with heavy toner coverage.
MEDIA TEMP
NORMAL (default)
REDUCED
OFF (default)
ON
Set this feature to REDUCED if you are having
problems with paper sticking together in the output
bin.
ENVIRONMENT
Optimizes performance in extreme low-
temperature environments.
Set this feature to ON if the product is operating in
a low-temperature environment and you are
having problems with print quality such as blisters
in the printed image.
LINE VOLTAGE
OFF (default)
Optimizes performance in low-voltage conditions.
ON
Set this feature to ON if the product is operating in
a low-voltage environment and you are having
problems with print quality such as blisters in the
printed image.
CLEANING FREQUENCY
NORMAL (default)
Set this feature to ALTERNATE if you are seeing
defects in the printed output that repeat at 38 mm
(1.5 inch) intervals. This feature increases the
frequency at which the C roller is cleaned. Setting
this feature to Alternate might also reduce printing
speed and increase the frequency of consumable
replacement.
ALTERNATE
D-BLADE BIAS
NORMAL (default)
Set this feature to ALTERNATE if you are seeing
short white vertical lines in the printed output. The
Alternate setting might also cause dark spots in the
printed output, so be sure to test this setting on a
few print jobs.
ALTERNATE
WASTE BIN
NORMAL (default)
ALTERNATE
OFF (default)
ON
Try setting this feature to ALTERNATE if you are
seeing lengthwise toner streaks in your printed
output, especially in jobs with low toner coverage.
BACKGROUND
HEAVY MODE
Select ON if pages are printing with a shaded
background. Using this feature can reduce gloss
levels.
30 PPM (default)
24 PPM
The default setting is 30 PPM. Select the 24 PPM
option to reduce the speed and improve fusing on
heavy paper.
TRACKING CONTROL
RESTORE OPTIMIZE
ON (default)
OFF
Improves color stability by adjusting the bias
voltage. This setting should remain ON.
Use this feature to return all the settings in the
Optimize menu to the factory-default values.
QUICK CALIBRATE
NOW
Performs a partial product calibration.
FULL CALIBRATE NOW
Performs all product calibrations.
ENWW
Configure device menu 25
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
CALIBRATE
NEUTRALS
CALIBRATION SOURCE
TRAY 1 <SIZE/TYPE> This menu item affects the toner mixture in order
to optimize neutral colors for color print jobs. A
TRAY 2 <SIZE/TYPE>
special sensor measures color on three specially
printed pages from a selected tray and adjusts the
color parameters. This corrects for too much or too
little cyan, magenta, yellow, or black toner, which
improves color consistency.
TRAY <X> <SIZE/
TYPE>
Choose the source tray, paper type, and paper
size for the calibration page.
To run calibration on different paper types, load the
desired paper type in a tray, select this menu item,
and then specify the loaded tray.
CALIBRATION TYPE
CALIBRATION SIZE
UNIT OF MEASURE
<TYPE>
<SIZE>
This item is available only if the selected tray type
is set to ANY TYPE.
This item is available only if the selected tray size
is set to ANY SIZE or ANY CUSTOM.
INCHES
The unit of measure to describe a custom paper
size. This item is available only if the selected
paper size is set to CUSTOM.
MILLIMETERS
X DIMENSION
Y DIMENSION
The X dimension of the custom paper size. This
item is available only if the selected paper size is
set to CUSTOM.
The Y dimension of the custom paper size. This
item is available only if the selected paper size is
set to CUSTOM.
AUTO CALIBRATE
NEUTRALS
ON
This menu item controls whether the CALIBRATE
NEUTRALS process is performed automatically. If
you select ON, the product performs the calibration
automatically whenever environmental conditions
indicate that it is required. Three calibration pages
are printed. You can recycle these pages when the
calibration is complete.
OFF
RESOLUTION
Image REt 4800
(default)
Sets the resolution at which the product prints. The
default value is Image REt 4800. Try the
1200x600 dpi setting to improve printing for
detailed line work or small text.
1200x600 dpi
OFF
EDGE CONTROL
The Edge Control setting determines how edges
are rendered. Edge control has two components:
adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive
LIGHT
halftoning increases edge sharpness. Trapping
reduces the effect of color-plane misregistration by
overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly.
NORMAL (default)
MAXIMUM
OFF turns off both trapping and adaptive
halftoning.
●
●
LIGHT sets trapping at a minimal level, and
adaptive halftoning is on.
26 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
NORMAL is the default trapping setting.
●
Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive
halftoning is on.
MAXIMUM is the most aggressive trapping
●
setting. Adaptive halftoning is on.
PROCESS CLEANING
PAGE
Allows you to create and process a cleaning page
for cleaning excess toner off the pressure roller in
the fuser. When the cleaning process runs, a blank
page is printed. This page can be discarded.
System setup menu
Use the SYSTEM SETUP menu to change product- configuration defaults such as sleep mode, product
personality (language), and jam recovery.
To display: Press Menu, select CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then select SYSTEM SETUP.
Item
Sub-item
DATE
Values
Description
DATE/TIME
----/[MMM]/[YY] YEAR=
[YYYY]/---/[DD] MONTH=
[YYYY]/[MMM]/-- DAY=
YYYY/MMM/DD
Allows you to set the correct date.
DATE FORMAT
Allows you to choose the order in
which the year, month, and day
appear in the date.
MMM/DD/YYYY
DD/MMM/YYYY
TIME
--:[MM] [PM] HOUR=
[HH]:-- [PM] MINUTE=
[HH]:[MM] -- AM/PM=
Allows you to select from various
configurations for the TIME format.
Different wizards appear
depending on the TIME FORMAT
selected.
TIME FORMAT
12 HOUR
Allows you to select 12 HOUR or
24 HOUR format.
24 HOUR
JOB STORAGE LIMIT
JOB HELD TIMEOUT
Continuous value
Range: 1–100
Default = 32
Allows you to specify the number
of Quick Copy jobs that can be
stored on the product. The default
value is 32. The maximum allowed
value is 100.
OFF
Allows you to set the amount of
time that Quick Copy jobs are kept
before being automatically deleted
from the queue. This menu item
only appears when a hard disk is
installed. The default value is
OFF.
4 HOURS
1 DAY
1 WEEK
SHOW ADDRESS
AUTO
OFF
This item determines whether the
product’s IP address is shown on
the display with the READY
message. The default is OFF.
ENWW
Configure device menu 27
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
RESTRICT COLOR USE
ENABLE COLOR
COLOR IF ALLOWED
DISABLE COLOR
Disables or restricts color use. The
default is ENABLE COLOR. To
use the COLOR IF ALLOWED
setting, set up user permissions
through the embedded Web
server, HP Easy Printer Care, or
Web Jetadmin. See Supported
COLOR/BLACK MIX
AUTO
This menu item establishes how
the product switches from color to
monochrome (black and white)
mode for maximum performance
and print cartridge life.
MOSTLY COLOR PAGES
MOSTLY BLACK PAGES
AUTO resets the product to the
factory default setting. The default
is AUTO.
Select MOSTLY COLOR PAGES
if nearly all of your print jobs are
color with high page coverage.
Select MOSTLY BLACK PAGES if
you print mostly monochrome print
jobs, or a combination of color and
monochrome print jobs.
TRAY BEHAVIOR
Use this menu to control how the
product handles paper trays and
related prompts at the control
panel.
USE REQUESTED TRAY
EXCLUSIVELY
FIRST
USE REQUESTED TRAY handles
jobs that have specified a specific
input tray. Two options are
available:
EXCLUSIVELY: The device
never selects a different tray
when the user has indicated
that a specific tray should be
used, even if that tray is
empty. This is the factory
default setting.
●
FIRST: The device can pull
from another tray if the
●
specified tray is empty, even
though the user specifically
indicated a tray for the job.
MANUALLY FEED PROMPT ALWAYS
UNLESS LOADED
This option controls whether a
manual feed message should
appear when the type or size for a
job does not match the specified
tray and the device pulls from the
28 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
multipurpose tray instead. Two
options are available:
ALWAYS: A prompt always
appears before using the
multipurpose tray. This is the
factory default setting.
●
UNLESS LOADED: A
●
message appears only if the
multipurpose tray is empty.
PS DEFER MEDIA
ENABLE
This option affects how paper is
handled when printing from an
Adobe PS print driver.
DISABLED
ENABLED uses HP’s paper
handling model.
●
●
DISABLED uses the Adobe
PS paper handling model.
SIZE/TYPE PROMPT
DISPLAY
This option controls whether the
tray configuration message
DO NOT DISPLAY
appears whenever a tray is closed.
Two options are available:
DISPLAY: This option shows
the tray configuration
●
message when a tray is
closed. You can configure the
tray settings directly from this
message.
DO NOT DISPLAY: This
option prevents the tray
configuration message from
automatically appearing.
●
USE ANOTHER TRAY
ENABLE
DISABLE
This option turns on or off the
control-panel prompt to select
another tray when the specified
tray is empty. Two options are
available:
ENABLE: When this option is
selected, the user is
●
prompted either to add paper
to the selected tray or to
choose a different tray. This is
the factory default setting.
DISABLE: When this option
is selected, the user is not
given the option of selecting a
different tray. The device
prompts the user to add paper
to the tray that was initially
selected.
●
DUPLEX BLANK PAGES
AUTO
YES
This option controls how the device
handles two-sided jobs
ENWW
Configure device menu 29
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
(duplexing). Two options are
available:
AUTO enables Smart
Duplexing, which instructs
the device not to process both
sides if the second side is
blank. This can improve print
speed.
●
YES disables Smart
●
Duplexing and forces the
duplexer to flip the sheet of
paper even if it is printed on
only one side. This might be
preferable for certain jobs that
use paper types such as
letterhead or prepunched
paper.
IMAGE ROTATION
LEFT TO RIGHT
RIGHT TO LEFT
ALTERNATE
This option allows an image from
an optional output accessory to be
rotated 180 degrees, so that
staples can be placed in the upper
corner (usually narrow format
devices).
SLEEP DELAY
1 MINUTE
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
45 MINUTES
60 MINUTES
90 MINUTES
2 HOURS
Reduces power consumption
when the product has been
inactive for the selected period.
The default is 60 MINUTES.
4 HOURS
WAKE TIME
<DAY OF THE WEEK>
OFF
Allows you to configure the daily
wake time for the product to avoid
warm-up or calibration time. Select
a day of the week and then select
CUSTOM. Set the wake time for
that day, and then choose whether
the wake time should be applied to
all days of the week.
CUSTOM
OPTIMUM SPEED/ENERGY
USAGE
FASTER FIRST PAGE
SAVE ENERGY
Sets the fuser cooling behavior.
If FASTER FIRST PAGE is
selected, power to the fuser is not
turned off between jobs. This
causes no impact to the first-page-
out time.
SAVE MOST ENERGY
If SAVE ENERGY is selected,
power to the fuser is turned off after
55 minutes of idle time. This
30 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
causes minimal impact to the first-
page-out time.
If SAVE MOST ENERGY is
selected, power to the fuser is
turned off after each job. This
causes the most impact to the first-
page-out time.
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
PERSONALITY
Range is 1 through 10.
Sets the brightness of the control
panel display. The default is 5.
AUTO
PCL
PDF
PS
Sets the default personality to
automatic switching, PCL, PDF, or
PS modes. The default is AUTO.
CLEARABLE WARNINGS
AUTO CONTINUE
JOB
ON
Sets whether a warning is cleared
on the control panel or when
another job is sent. The default is
ON.
OFF
ON
Determines product behavior
when the system generates an
Auto Continuable error. The
default is ON.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
STOP AT LOW
Sets product behavior when a
cartridge is low. The default is
STOP AT LOW. This option allows
the product to continue printing
until a color supply is exhausted.
When the product is set to STOP
AT OUT, printing pauses until the
color supply is replaced.
STOP AT OUT
OVERRIDE AT OUT 1
OVERRIDE AT OUT 2
The product displays an “Order
supplies” message when a supply
is running low and a “Replace
supplies” message when a supply
has been depleted. To ensure
optimal print quality, HP
recommends replacing a supply
when the “Replace supplies”
message is displayed. Replacing
the supply at this point can help
prevent waste of media or other
supplies when one supply begins
producing poor print quality. The
Override options allow the product
to continue using color supplies,
such as print cartridges, the image
drum, the roller kit, and the image
fuser kit, that have reached their
recommended replacement
points.
ENWW
Configure device menu 31
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
CAUTION: Using an Override
option may result in unsatisfactory
print quality and unavailability of
certain features (such as toner
remaining information).
CAUTION: All print defects or
supply failures incurred when an
HP supply is used in Override
mode are not considered defects in
materials or workmanship under
the HP Print Cartridge and Image
Drum Limited Warranty Statement.
The Override options can be
enabled or disabled at any time
and do not have to be re-enabled
for each color supply. The product
automatically continues printing
when a color supply reaches its
recommended replacement point.
The message, “Replace supply
Override in use,” displays on the
control panel while a color supply
is used in Override mode. When
the color supply is replaced with a
new one, Override mode is de-
activated until another color supply
reaches its recommended
replacement point.
OVERRIDE AT OUT 1 allows
printing to continue when a color
supply is out, but displays a
warning. Printing stops if there is a
risk of damage to product
components.
OVERRIDE AT OUT 2 allows
printing to continue when the color
supply is out, but displays a
warning message. Printing is not
stopped even if there is a risk of
damage to product components.
SUPPLY INFORMATION
PAGES REMAINING
ORDER MESSAGES
LEVEL GAUGE
ON
OFF
ORDER AT
RANGE=0-100%
The user can set the supply
percentage remaining at which the
ORDER AT message appears.
The default is 5%.
COLOR SUPPLY OUT
STOP
Sets the COLOR SUPPLY OUT
product behavior when a color
supply is empty. When the product
is set to AUTOCONTINUE
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK
BLACK , the product continues
32 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
printing with black toner only. The
default is STOP.
JAM RECOVERY
AUTO
OFF
ON
Sets whether the product will
attempt to reprint pages after a
jam. The default is AUTO.
LANGUAGE
A listing of available languages
appears.
Sets the default language. The
default language is ENGLISH.
Output Setup menu
This menu and associated sub-items displays only when an optional output accessory is attached to
the product.
To display: Press Menu, select CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then select OUTPUT SETUP.
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
OUTPUT SETUP
This menu appears when the
HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker
Accessory or the HP Booklet
Maker/Finisher Accessory is
attached.
MULTIFUNC FINISHER
or
OPERATION MODE
MAILBOX
STACKER
Allows you to set the default
operation mode. MAILBOX
assigns a user or group of users
to each output bin. STACKER
treats all of the output bins as a
single large bin. When one bin
gets full, jobs are automatically
routed to the next bin.
MBM-3 BIN STAPLER
STAPLES
NONE
Sets the default staple selection
for documents sent to the device
when no staple value is specified.
ONE LEFT ANGLED
ONE RIGHT ANGLED
TWO LEFT
TWO RIGHT
TWO TOP
STAPLES OUT
STOP
Sets the default behavior when a
job specifies stapling and the
stapler is out of staples. STOP
stops printing if the stapler runs
out of staples. CONTINUE allows
a job to continue printing even
when the device is out of staples.
CONTINUE
OFFSET
OFF
ON
Turns the job offset feature on or
off. When job offset is on, each
copy of a job is shifted to one side
in the output bin in order to keep
ENWW
Configure device menu 33
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
each copy separate from the
others.
A4/LETTER STAPLE
NORMAL
Controls the speed of the print
engine to prevent paper jams by
using the stapler buffer.
ALTERNATE 1
ALTERNATE 2
With the NORMAL, the engine
speed is normal, and the stapler
buffer is used.
If the ALTERNATE 1 setting is
enabled, and the engine is in
Autosense Mode, the engine
slows down to prevent jams. If the
product is NOT in Autosense
Mode, the engine performs at
normal speed, using the stapler
buffer.
If the ALTERNATE 2 setting is
enabled, the engine always
slows down to prevent jams,
never using the stapler buffer.
FOLD LTR-R & A4 - R
–4.0 mm
–3.5 mm
–3.0 mm
–2.5 mm
–2.0 mm
–1.5 mm
–1.0 mm
–0.5 mm
0.0 mm
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
–4.0 mm
–3.5 mm
–3.0 mm
Adjusts the fold line for Letter and
A4 size paper (booklet maker
only).
FOLD LEGAL & JISB4
Adjusts the fold line for Legal and
JIS B4 size paper (booklet maker
only).
34 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
–2.5 mm
–2.0 mm
–1.5 mm
–1.0 mm
–0.5 mm
0.0 mm
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
–4.0 mm
–3.5 mm
–3.0 mm
–2.5 mm
–2.0 mm
–1.5 mm
–1.0 mm
–0.5 mm
0.0 mm
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
FOLD 11X17 & A3
Adjusts the fold line for Legal and
11x17 and A3 size paper (booklet
maker only).
ENWW
Configure device menu 35
I/O menu
Items on the I/O (input/output) menu affect the communication between the product and the computer.
If the product contains an HP Jetdirect print server, you can configure basic networking parameters by
using this submenu. You can also configure these and other parameters through HP Web Jetadmin or
the embedded Web server.
To display: Press Menu, select CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then select I/O.
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
I/O TIMEOUT
15 SECONDS
Range: 5 - 300
Allows you to set the product I/O
TIMEOUT in seconds.
Use this setting to adjust timeout
for the best performance. If data
from other ports appears in the
middle of your print job, increase
the timeout value.
EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU See the next table for a list of options.
Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO <X> Jetdirect menus
Item
Sub-item
ENABLE
Values
OFF
Description
TCP/IP
OFF: Disable the TCP/IP protocol.
ON
ON*: Enable the TCP/IP protocol.
HOST NAME
An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to
identify the product. This name is listed on the
HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name
is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the
LAN hardware (MAC) address.
IPV4 SETTINGS
CONFIG METHOD
Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be
configured on the HP Jetdirect print server.
BOOTP
DHCP
●
●
●
●
Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic
configuration from a BootP server.
AUTO IP
MANUAL
Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) for
automatic configuration from a DHCPv4 server. If
selected and a DHCP lease exists, DHCP RELEASE
and DHCP RENEW menus are available to set DHCP
lease options.
Use Auto IP for automatic link-local IPv4 addressing.
An address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned
automatically.
Use the MANUAL SETTINGS menu to configure TCP/
IPv4 parameters.
DEFAULT IP
Specify the IP address to default to when the print
server is unable to obtain an IP address from the
network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for
example, when manually configured to use BootP or
DHCP).
AUTO IP
LEGACY
●
●
36 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO <X> Jetdirect menus (continued)
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
AUTO IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set.
LEGACY: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent
with older HP Jetdirect products.
DHCP RELEASE
This menu appears if CONFIG METHOD was set to
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.
NO
●
●
NO*: The current DHCP lease is saved.
YES
YES: The current DHCP lease and the leased IP
address are released.
DHCP RENEW
This menu appears if CONFIG METHOD was set to
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.
NO
●
●
NO*: The print server does not request to renew the
DHCP lease.
YES
YES: The print server requests to renew the current
DHCP lease.
MANUAL SETTINGS
(Available only if CONFIG METHOD is set to
MANUAL) Configure parameters directly from the
printer control panel:
IP ADDRESS
●
●
●
●
SUBNET MASK
SYSLOG SERVER
IP ADDRESS: The unique IP address of the printer,
where n is a value from 0 to 255.
SUBNET MASK: The subnet mask for the printer,
where m is a value from 0 to 255.
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
SYSLOG SERVER: The IP address of the syslog
server used to receive and log syslog messages.
IDLE TIMEOUT
●
DEFAULT GATEWAY: The IP address of the gateway
or router used for communications with other networks.
IDLE TIMEOUT: The time period, in seconds, after
which an idle TCP print data connection is closed
(default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout).
PRIMARY DNS
SECONDARY DNS
ENABLE
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary DNS
Server.
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary
Domain Name System (DNS) Server.
IPV6 SETTINGS
Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the
print server.
OFF
ON
●
●
OFF*: IPv6 is disabled.
ON: IPv6 is enabled.
ADDRESS
Use this item to manually configure an IPv6 address.
MANUAL
SETTINGS
Use the MANUAL SETTINGS menu to enable and
manually configure a TCP/ IPv6 address.
●
●
ADDRESS
Select ENABLE and choose ON to enable manual
configuration, or OFF to disable manual configuration.
ENWW
Configure device menu 37
Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO <X> Jetdirect menus (continued)
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
ADDRESS: Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal
digit IPv6 node address that uses the colon
hexadecimal syntax.
DHCPV6 POLICY
ROUTER SPECIFIED: The stateful auto-configuration
method to be used by the print server is determined by
a router. The router specifies whether the print server
obtains its address, its configuration information, or
both from a DHCPv6 server.
ROUTER
●
●
●
SPECIFIED
ROUTER
UNAVAILABLE
ROUTER UNAVAILABLE: If a router is not available,
the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.
ALWAYS
ALWAYS: Whether or not a router is available, the print
server always attempts to obtain its stateful
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.
PRIMARY DNS
Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary
DNS server that the print server should use.
SECONDARY DNS
Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a
secondary DNS server that the print server should use.
PROXY SERVER
Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded
applications in the product. A proxy server is typically
used by network clients for Internet access. It caches
Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security,
for those clients.
To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or
fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to
255 octets.
For some networks, you might need to contact your
Internet Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server
address.
PROXY PORT
Type the port number used by the proxy server for
client support. The port number identifies the port
reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be
a value from 0 to 65535.
IPX/SPX
ENABLE
OFF
OFF: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.
ON
ON*: Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.
FRAME TYPE
AUTO
EN_8023
EN_II
EN_8022
EN_SNAP
OFF
Selects the frame-type setting for your network.
AUTO: Automatically sets and limits the frame type to
the first one detected.
EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAPare frame-
type selections for Ethernet networks
APPLETALK
DLC//LLC
ENABLE
ENABLE
OFF: Disable the AppleTalk protocol.
ON*: Enable the AppleTalk protocol.
OFF: Disable the DLC/LLC protocol.
ON*: Enable the DLC/LLC protocol.
ON
OFF
ON
38 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO <X> Jetdirect menus (continued)
Item
Sub-item
Values
YES
Description
SECURITY
PRINT SEC PAGE
YES: Prints a page that contains the current security
settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.
NO
NO*: A security settings page is not printed.
SECURE WEB
HTTPS REQUIRED
For configuration management, specify whether the
embedded Web server will accept communications
using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and
HTTPS.
HTTP/HTTPS
OPTIONAL
HTTPS REQUIRED: For secure, encrypted
communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The
print server will appear as a secure site.
HTTP/HTTPS OPTIONAL: Access using either HTTP
or HTTPS is permitted.
IPSEC
KEEP
Specify the IPsec or Firewall status on the print server.
DISABLE
KEEP: IPsec/Firewall status remains the same as
currently configured.
DISABLE: IPsec/Firewall operation on the print server
is disabled.
RESET SECURITY
EMBEDDED TESTS
NO
Specify whether the current security settings on the
print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.
YES
NO*: The current security settings are maintained.
YES: Security settings are reset to factory defaults.
DIAGNOSTICS
EXECUTE
This menu provides tests to help diagnose network
hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems.
Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault
is internal or external to the product. Use an embedded
test to check hardware and communication paths on
the print server. After you select and enable a test and
set the execution time, you must select EXECUTE to
initiate the test.
Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs
continuously until either the product is turned off, or an
error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed.
LAN HW TEST
CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase
your TCP/IP configuration.
This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal
loopback test will send and receive packets only on the
internal network hardware. There are no external
transmissions on your network.
Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it.
HTTP TEST
SNMP TEST
This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving
predefined pages from the product, and tests the
embedded Web server.
Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it.
This test checks operation of SNMP communications
by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the product.
ENWW
Configure device menu 39
Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO <X> Jetdirect menus (continued)
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it.
DATA PATH TEST
This test helps to identify data path and corruption
problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation
product. It sends a predefined PS file to the product,
However, the test is paperless; the file will not print.
Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it.
SELECT ALL TESTS
EXECUTION TIME [H]
Select this item to run all the embedded tests. Select
YES to run all tests, or select NO to not run all tests.
Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that
an embedded test will be run. You can select a value
from 1 to 60 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs
indefinitely until an error occurs or the product is turned
off.
Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path
tests is printed after the tests have completed.
EXECUTE
NO*: Do not initiate the selected tests.
YES: Initiate the selected tests.
PING TEST
This test is used to check network communications.
This test sends link-level packets to a remote network
host, then waits for an appropriate response.
DEST TYPE
Specify whether the target device is an IPv4 or IPv6
node.
DEST IPV4
DEST IPV6
PACKET SIZE
Type the IPv4 address.
Type the IPv6 address.
Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to
the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the
maximum is 2048.
TIMEOUT
Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a
response from the remote host. The default is 1 and
the maximum is 100.
COUNT
Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this
test. Select a value from 1 to 100. To configure the test
to run continuously, select 0.
PRINT RESULTS
If the ping test was not set for continuous operation,
you can choose to print the test results. Select YES to
print results. If you select NO (default), results are not
printed.
EXECUTE
Specify whether to initiate the ping test. Select YES to
initiate the test, or NO to not run the test.
PING RESULTS
Use this item to view the ping test status and results
using the control panel display.
PACKETS SENT
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the
remote host since the most recent test was initiated or
completed.
40 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO <X> Jetdirect menus (continued)
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
PACKETS RECEIVED
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from
the remote host since the most recent test was initiated
or completed.
PERCENT LOST
RTT MIN
Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent
with no response from the remote host since the most
recent test was initiated or completed.
Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission
and response.
RTT MAX
Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission
and response.
RTT AVERAGE
PING IN PROGRESS
REFRESH
Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to
4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and
response.
Shows whether a ping test is in progress. YES
indicates a test in progress, and NO indicates that a
test completed or was not run.
When viewing the ping test results, this item updates
the ping test data with current results. Select YES to
update the data, or NO to maintain the existing data.
However, a refresh automatically occurs when the
menu times out or you manually return to the main
menu.
LINK SPEED
AUTO
The link speed and communication mode of the print
server must match the network. The available settings
depend on the product and installed print server. Select
one of the following link configuration settings:
10T HALF: 10 Mbps, half-
duplex operation.
10T FULL: 10 Mbps, full-
duplex operation.
CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network
communications with the print server and network
device might be lost.
100TX HALF: 100 Mbps,
half-duplex operation.
AUTO*: The print server uses auto-negotiation to
configure itself with the highest link speed and
communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails,
either 100TX HALF or 10TX HALF is set depending on
the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A
1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.)
100TX FULL: 100 Mbps,
full-duplex operation.
100TX AUTO: Limits
auto-negotiation to a
maximum link speed of
100 Mbps.
1000TX FULL: 1000
Mbps, full-duplex
operation.
PRINT PROTOCOLS
Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration
of the following protocols: IPX/SPX, Novell NetWare,
AppleTalk, DLC/LLC.
Resets menu
The RESETS menu allows you to reset factory settings, disable and enable sleep mode, and update
the product after new supplies are installed.
ENWW
Configure device menu 41
To display: Press Menu, select CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then select RESETS.
Item
Values
Description
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS
Allows you to clear the page buffer, remove
all perishable personality data, reset the
printing environment, and return all default
settings to factory defaults.
RESET CALIBRATION
SLEEP MODE
Resets calibration values on the formatter.
OFF
If SLEEP MODE is OFF, the product will
never enter power save mode and no
asterisk will appear next to any item when
the user enters the menu item SLEEP
DELAY.
LOW
HIGH
The LOW setting has a shorter wake-up
time than the HIGH setting. The default
setting is either LOW or HIGH, depending
on your country/region.
42 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Diagnostics menu
The DIAGNOSTICS menu allows you to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with
the product.
To display: Press Menu and then select DIAGNOSTICS.
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
PRINT EVENT LOG
Prints a report containing the last
50 entries in the product’s event
log, starting with the most recent.
SHOW EVENT LOG
Displays the last 50 events, starting
with the most recent.
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
Prints a page that includes
instructions, pages for each color,
a demo page, and a configuration
page. These pages can help isolate
print-quality problems.
PRINT DIAGNOSTICS
PAGE
Prints a page that can assist in
diagnosing product problems.
DISABLE CARTRIDGE
CHECK
This item allows you to remove a
print cartridge to help determine
which cartridge is the source of a
problem.
PAPER PATH SENSORS
PAPER PATH TEST
Performs a test on each of the
product’s sensors to determine if
they are working correctly and
displays the status of each sensor.
Tests the paper-handling features
of the product, such as the
configuration of the trays.
PRINT TEST PAGE
SOURCE
Generates a page for testing the
paper-handling features. You must
define the path for the test in order
to test specific paper paths.
ALL TRAYS
TRAY 1
Specifies whether the test page is
printed from all trays or from a
specific tray.
TRAY 2
(Additional trays are shown, if
applicable.)
DESTINATION
ALL BINS
Appears if there is an optional
output accessory connected to the
product.
(Additional bins are shown, if
applicable.)
Selects the output option for the
test page. You can send the test
page to all output bins or only to a
specific bin.
DUPLEX
OFF
ON
Determines whether the duplexer
is included in the test.
ENWW
Diagnostics menu 43
Item
Sub-item
COPIES
Values
1
Description
Determines how many pages
should be sent from the specified
source as part of the test.
10
50
100
500
FINISHING PAPER PATH
TEST
This item only appears if there is an
optional stapler/stacker or booklet
maker connected to the product.
Tests the paper-handling features
on the output accessory.
STACK
DESTINATION BIN
MEDIA SIZE
Sets up the options for testing the
stapler/stacker or booklet maker
paper path.
MEDIA TYPE
COPIES
After setting up all of the options,
select PRINT TEST PAGE to run
the test.
DUPLEX
PRINT TEST PAGE
FINISHING OPTIONS
DESTINATION BIN
MEDIA SIZE
STAPLES
Sets up the options for testing the
stapler/stacker or booklet maker
stapling functions.
After setting up all of the options,
select PRINT TEST PAGE to run
the test.
MEDIA TYPE
COPIES
DUPLEX
PRINT TEST PAGE
MEDIA SIZE
BOOKLET MAKER (booklet
maker only)
Sets up the options for testing the
booklet-making functions of the
booklet maker.
MEDIA TYPE
COPIES
After setting up all of the options,
select PRINT TEST PAGE to run
the test.
DUPLEX
PRINT TEST PAGE
MANUAL SENSOR TEST
Performs tests to determine
whether the paper path sensors are
operating correctly.
MANUAL SENSOR TEST
2
Performs additional tests to
determine whether the paper path
sensors are operating correctly.
COMPONENT TEST
TRANSFER MOTORS
BELT ONLY
Activate individual parts
independently to isolate noise,
leaking, and other hardware
issues.
IMAGE DRUM MOTORS
44 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Item
Sub-item
Values
Description
BLACK LASER SCANNER
CYAN LASER SCANNER
MAGENTA LASER SCANNER
YELLOW LASER SCANNER
FUSER MOTOR
FUSER PRESSURE RELEASE
MOTOR
BLACK ALIENATION MOTOR
CYAN ALIENATION MOTOR
MAGENTA ALIENATION MOTOR
YELLOW ALIENATION MOTOR
ITB CONTACT/ALIENATION
PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR
TRAY 1 PICKUP SOLENOID
TRAY 2 PICKUP MOTOR
TRAY 2 PICKUP SOLENOID
TRAY 3 PICKUP MOTOR
TRAY 3 PICKUP SOLENOID
TRAY 4 PICKUP MOTOR
TRAY 4 PICKUP SOLENOID
TRAY 5 PICKUP MOTOR
TRAY 5 PICKUP SOLENOID
DUPLEXER REVERSE MOTOR
DUPLEXER REFEED MOTOR
REPEAT
ONCE (default)
Allows the user to specify the
number of times the device
CONTINUOUS
sequences. To terminate the test at
any time the user can press Stop.
PRINT/STOP TEST
Range is 0 - 60,000 milliseconds.
The default is 0.
Isolates print quality faults more
accurately by stopping the product
in mid-print cycle, which allows you
to see where the image begins to
degrade. This causes a jam
message that might need to be
manually cleared. A service
representative should perform this
test.
COLOR BAND TEST
PRINT TEST PAGE
Prints a color band test page that is
used to identify arcing in the high-
voltage power supply.
ENWW
Diagnostics menu 45
Item
Sub-item
COPIES
Values
Description
Range is 1 to 30. The default value Allows the user to determine how
is 1.
many copies of the internal page
are printed.
FINISHER TESTS
If the optional stapler/stacker or
booklet maker is installed, this
menu runs tests on specific
sensors and components. Different
values are displayed, based on the
accessory installed.
MANUAL SENSOR TEST
COMPONENT TESTS
READ ALL ONCE
Initiates a diagnostic test of the
sensors on the stapler/stacker or
booklet maker.
CONTINUOUS READING
M1 - DELIVER MOTOR (booklet
maker only)
Activates a diagnostic test for the
selected motor or solenoid.
M2 - FOLDING MOTOR (booklet
maker only)
M3 - GUIDE MOTOR (booklet
maker only)
M4 - GUIDE PLATE MOTOR
(booklet maker only)
M9 - INLET MOTOR (booklet
maker only)
M31 - ENTRANCE MOTOR
M36 - SWING MOTOR
M37 - TRAY 1 MOTOR
M38 - TRAY 2 MOTOR
M39 - PROCESS MOTOR
SL1 - FLAPPER 1 SOLENOID
(booklet maker only)
SL2 - FLAPPER 2 SOLENOID
(booklet maker only)
SL4 - BOOKLET SOLENOID
(booklet maker only)
SL5 - SWITCH SOLENOID
(booklet maker only)
SL31 - ROLLER 1A SOLENOID
SL32 - BUFFER SOLENOID
SL33 - OUTPUT SOLENOID
SL34 - GUIDE SOLENOID
46 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
48 Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Supported printer drivers for Windows
HP PCL 6
●
●
●
HP postscript emulation Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PS)
HP PCL 5 UPD Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PCL 5)
The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes
the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.
ENWW
Supported printer drivers for Windows 51
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)
The HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) for Windows is a single driver that gives you instant access to
virtually any HP LaserJet product, from any location, without downloading separate drivers. It is built on
proven HP print driver technology and has been tested thoroughly and used with many software
programs. It is a powerful solution that performs consistently over time.
The HP UPD communicates directly with each HP product, gathers configuration information, and then
customizes the user interface to show the product’s unique, available features. It automatically enables
features that are available for the product, such as two-sided printing and stapling, so you do not need
to enable them manually.
UPD installation modes
Traditional mode
Use this mode if you are installing the driver from a CD for a single computer.
When installed with this mode, UPD operates like traditional printer drivers.
If you use this mode, you must install UPD separately for each computer.
●
●
●
●
Dynamic mode
Use this mode if you are installing the driver for a mobile computer, so you can
discover and print to HP products in any location.
Use this mode if you are installing UPD for a workgroup.
●
●
To use this mode, download UPD from the Internet. See www.hp.com/go/
upd.
52 Chapter 3 Software for Windows
ENWW
Select the correct printer driver for Windows
Printer drivers provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the
product (using a printer language). Check the installation notes and readme files on the product CD for
additional software and languages.
HP PCL 6 driver description
Provided as the default driver
●
●
●
●
Recommended for printing in all Windows environments
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for most users
Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the best speed in Windows
environments
Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are based on
PCL 5
●
HP UPD PS driver description
Provided on the product CD and at www.hp.com/go/cljcp6015_software
●
●
●
Installs from the Add Printer wizard
Recommended for printing with Adobe® software programs or with other highly graphics-intensive
software programs
Provides support for printing from postscript emulation needs, or for postscript flash font support
●
HP UPD PCL 5 driver description
Provided on the product CD and at www.hp.com/go/cljcp6015_software
●
●
●
●
●
●
Installs from the Add Printer wizard
Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments
Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products
The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs
The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the product to be set to
PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)
Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single driver for use with multiple
printer models
●
●
Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows computer
ENWW
Select the correct printer driver for Windows 53
Priority for print settings
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed
anywhere else.
●
●
●
●
●
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower
priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open
the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override settings
anywhere else in the printing software.
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in
all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog
boxes.
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority
than changes made anywhere else.
54 Chapter 3 Software for Windows
ENWW
Change printer-driver settings for Windows
Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for all
Change the product configuration
until the software program is closed
print jobs
settings
1. On the File menu in the software
1. Windows XP and Windows
Server 2003 (using the default
Start menu view): Click Start, and
then click Printers and Faxes.
1. Windows XP and Windows
Server 2003 (using the default
Start menu view): Click Start, and
then click Printers and Faxes.
program, click Print.
2. Select the driver, and then click
Properties or Preferences.
-or-
-or-
The steps can vary; this procedure is
most common.
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 (using the
Classic Start menu view): Click
Start, click Settings, and then click
Printers.
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 (using the
Classic Start menu view): Click
Start, click Settings, and then click
Printers.
-or-
-or-
Windows Vista: Click Start, click
Control Panel, and then in the
category for Hardware and
Sound click Printer.
Windows Vista: Click Start, click
Control Panel, and then in the
category for Hardware and
Sound click Printer.
2. Right-click the driver icon, and then 2. Right-click the driver icon, and then
select Printing Preferences.
select Properties.
3. Click the Device Settings tab.
ENWW
Change printer-driver settings for Windows 55
Remove software for Windows
1. Click Start, and then click All Programs.
2. Click HP, and then click HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series product.
3. Click Uninstall HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series product, and then follow the onscreen
instructions to remove the software.
56 Chapter 3 Software for Windows
ENWW
Supported utilities for Windows
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool for HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your
intranet, and it should be installed only on the network administrator’s computer.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems,
When installed on a host server, a Windows client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a
supported Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later)
by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
Embedded Web server
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about
device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet
Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Firefox.
The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server.
The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a network-
connected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or
configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the
embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find
the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page,
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see
HP Easy Printer Care
HP Easy Printer Care software is a program that you can use for the following tasks:
Check the product status
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check the supplies status and use HP SureSupply to shop online for supplies
Set up alerts
View product usage reports
View product documentation
Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools
Use HP Proactive Support to routinely scan your printing system and to prevent potential problems.
HP Proactive Support can update software, firmware, and HP printer drivers.
You can view HP Easy Printer Care software when the product is directly connected to your computer
or when it is connected to a network.
ENWW
Supported utilities for Windows 57
Supported operating systems
●
●
Microsoft® Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP, Service Pack 2 (Home and
Professional editions)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Vista™
●
●
●
Supported browsers
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or 7.0
provides updated information about supported browsers and a list of HP products that support HP Easy
Printer Care software.
For more information about using HP Easy Printer Care software, see HP Easy Printer Care
58 Chapter 3 Software for Windows
ENWW
60 Chapter 3 Software for Windows
ENWW
Software for Macintosh
Supported operating systems for Macintosh
The device supports the following Macintosh operating systems:
Mac OS X V10.2.8, V10.3, V10.4 and later
●
NOTE: For Mac OS V10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.
Supported printer drivers for Macintosh
The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs),
and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to device features.
Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer.
Remove software from Macintosh operating systems
To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.
Priority for print settings for Macintosh
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here might override settings changed
anywhere else.
●
●
●
●
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower
priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in
all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog
boxes.
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority
than changes made anywhere else.
Change printer-driver settings for Macintosh
Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for all
Change the product configuration
settings
until the software program is closed
print jobs
1. On the File menu, click Print.
1. On the File menu, click Print.
Mac OS X V10.2.8
2. Change the settings that you want 2. Change the settings that you want 1. In the Finder, on the Go menu, click
on the various menus.
on the various menus.
Applications.
3. On the Presets menu, click Save
2. Open Utilities, and then open Print
as and type a name for the preset.
Center.
3. Click on the print queue.
62 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh
ENWW
Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for all
Change the product configuration
settings
until the software program is closed
print jobs
These settings are saved in the
4. On the Printers menu, click
Presets menu. To use the new settings,
you must select the saved preset option
every time you open a program and print.
Configure.
5. Click the Installable Options
menu.
NOTE: Configuration settings might
not be available in Classic mode.
Mac OS X V10.3 or Mac OS X V10.4
1. From the Apple menu, click System
Preferences and then Print &
Fax.
2. Click Printer Setup.
3. Click the Installable Options
menu.
Mac OS X V10.5
1. From the Apple menu, click System
Preferences and then Print &
Fax.
2. Click Options & Supplies.
3. Click the Driver menu.
4. Select the driver from the list, and
configure the installed options.
Software for Macintosh computers
HP Printer Utility
Use the HP Printer Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver.
You can use the HP Printer Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is
connected to a TCP/IP-based network.
Open the HP Printer Utility
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2.8
1. Open the Finder, and then click Applications.
2. Click Library, and then click Printers.
3. Click hp, and then click Utilities.
4. Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector.
5. Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility.
ENWW
Software for Macintosh 63
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3 and V10.4
1. Open the Finder, click Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility.
2. Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility.
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.5
From the Printer menu, click Printer Utility.
-or-
▲
From the Print Queue, click the Utility icon.
HP Printer Utility features
The HP Printer Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list.
The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages.
Item
Description
Configuration Page
Supplies Status
HP Support
Prints a configuration page.
Shows the device supplies status and provides links for online supplies-ordering.
Provides access to technical assistance, online supplies ordering, online registration, and
recycling and return information.
File Upload
Transfers files from the computer to the device.
Upload Fonts
Transfers font files from the computer to the device.
Firmware Update
Duplex Mode
Transfers updated firmware files from the computer to the device.
Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode.
Economode & Toner Density
Resolution
Turns on the Economode setting to conserve toner, or adjusts toner density.
Changes the resolution settings, including the REt setting.
Locks or unlocks storage products, such as a hard disk.
Manages print jobs that are stored on the device hard disk.
Changes the default tray settings.
Lock Resources
Stored Jobs
Trays Configuration
IP Settings
Changes the device network settings and provides access to the embedded Web server.
Bonjour Settings
Provides the ability to turn on or off Bonjour support or change the device service name
that is listed on a network.
Additional Settings
E-mail Alerts
Provides access to the embedded Web server.
Configures the device to send e-mail notices for certain events.
Supported utilities for Macintosh
Embedded Web server
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about
device and network activities. For more information, see Embedded Web server sections
64 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh
ENWW
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver
Print
Create and use printing presets in Macintosh
Use printing presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse.
Create a printing preset
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Select the driver.
3. Select the print settings.
4. In the Presets box, click Save As..., and type a name for the preset.
5. Click OK.
Use printing presets
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Select the driver.
3. In the Presets box, select the printing preset that you want to use.
NOTE: To use printer-driver default settings, select Standard.
Resize documents or print on a custom paper size
You can scale a document to fit on a different size of paper.
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Open the Paper Handling menu.
3. In the area for Destination Paper Size, select Scale to fit paper size, and then select the size
from the drop-down list.
4. If you want to use only paper that is smaller than the document, select Scale down only.
Print a cover page
You can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message (such as “Confidential”).
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Select the driver.
3. Open the Cover Page menu, and then select whether to print the cover page Before Document
or After Document.
4. In the Cover Page Type menu, select the message that you want to print on the cover page.
NOTE: To print a blank cover page, select Standard as the Cover Page Type.
ENWW
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 65
Use watermarks
A watermark is a notice, such as “Confidential,” that is printed in the background of each page of a
document.
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Open the Watermarks menu.
3. Next to Mode, select the type of watermark to use. Select Watermark to print a semi-transparent
message. Select Overlay to print a message that is not transparent.
4. Next to Pages, select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only.
5. Next to Text, select one of the standard messages, or select Custom and type a new message in
the box.
6. Select options for the remaining settings.
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper in Macintosh
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way
to print draft pages.
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Select the driver.
3. Open the Layout menu.
4. Next to Pages per Sheet, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1, 2,
4, 6, 9, or 16).
5. Next to Layout Direction, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.
6. Next to Borders, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.
66 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh
ENWW
Print on both sides of the page (duplex printing)
Use automatic duplex printing
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.
●
●
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the
tray.
2. On the File menu, click Print.
3. Open the Layout menu.
4. Next to Two-Sided, select either Long-Edge Binding or Short-Edge Binding.
5. Click Print.
Print on both sides manually
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.
●
●
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the
tray.
CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond).
2. On the File menu, click Print.
3. On the Finishing menu, select Manually Print on 2nd Side.
4. Click Print. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears on the computer screen
before replacing the output stack in tray 1 for printing the second half.
5. Go to the printer, and remove any blank paper that is in tray 1.
6. Insert the printed stack face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first in tray 1. You
must print the second side from tray 1.
7. If prompted, press the appropriate control-panel button to continue.
Set the stapling options
If a finishing device that has a stapler is installed, you can staple documents.
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Open the Finishing menu.
3. In the Stapling Options drop-down list, select the stapling option that you want to use.
ENWW
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 67
Store jobs
You can store jobs on the product so you can print them at any time. You can share stored jobs with
other users, or you can make them private.
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Open the Job Storage menu.
3. In the Job Storage: drop-down list, select the type of stored job.
4. For the Stored Job, Private Job, and Private Stored Job types of stored jobs, enter a name for
the stored job in the box next to Job Name:.
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name.
Use Job Name + (1 - 99) appends a unique number to the end of the job name.
●
●
Replace Existing File overwrites the existing stored job with the new one.
5. If you selected Stored Job or Private Job in step 3, type a 4-digit number in the box next to PIN
To Print (0000 - 9999). When other people attempt to print this job, the product prompts them to
enter this PIN number.
Set the color options
Use the Color Options pop-up menu to control how colors are interpreted and printed from software
programs.
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2. Select the driver.
3. Open the Color Options pop-up menu.
4. Click Show Advanced Options.
5. Adjust the individual settings for text, graphics, and photographs.
Use the Services menu
If the product is connected to a network, use the Services menu to obtain product and supply-status
information.
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Open the Services menu.
68 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh
ENWW
3. To open the embedded Web server and perform a maintenance task, do the following:
a. Select Device Maintenance.
b. Select a task from the drop-down list.
c. Click Launch.
4. To go to various support Web sites for this device, do the following:
a. Select Services on the Web.
b. Select Internet Services, and select an option from the drop-down list.
c. Click Go!.
ENWW
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 69
70 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh
ENWW
Network connection
All product models except for the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 include an embedded HP Jetdirect print
server, which supports connection to a network using the local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45)
on the back of the product. For more information about configuring the product on a network see Network
Figure 5-2 Network connection
1
2
1
2
Network cable
Network port
ENWW
Network connection 73
74 Chapter 5 Connect the product
ENWW
Benefits of a network connection
Connecting the product to a network provides a number of benefits:
All network users can share the same product.
●
●
You can manage the product remotely, from any computer on the network, by using the embedded
Web server (EWS).
You can use the HP Easy Printer Care software to view supply usage on all HP products connected
to the network. This makes it easy to centrally manage ordering replacement cartridges and other
supplies.
●
●
For large enterprise businesses, you can also manage the product remotely by using HP Web
Jetadmin.
76 Chapter 6 Network configuration
ENWW
Supported network protocols
The product supports the TCP/IP network protocol, the most widely used and accepted networking
protocol. Many networking services utilize this protocol. For more information, see TCP/IP
on page 78. The following table lists the supported networking services and protocols.
Table 6-1 Printing
Service name
Description
port9100 (Direct Mode)
Printing service
Printing service
Line printer daemon (LPD)
Table 6-2 Network device discovery
Service name
Description
SLP (Service Location Protocol)
Bonjour
Device-discovery protocol, used to help find and configure
network devices. Used primarily by Microsoft-based programs.
Device-discovery protocol, used to help find and configure
network devices. Used primarily by Apple Macintosh-based
programs.
Table 6-3 Messaging and management
Service name
Description
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol)
Allows Web browsers to communicate with embedded Web
server.
EWS (embedded Web server)
Allows a user to manage the product through a Web browser.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
Used by network applications for product management. SNMP
v1 and standard MIB-II (Management Information Base)
objects are supported.
Table 6-4 IP addressing
Service name
Description
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
For automatic IP address assignment. The DHCP server
provides the product with an IP address. Generally, no user
intervention is required for the product to obtain an IP address
from a DHCP server.
BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)
For automatic IP address assignment. The BOOTP server
provides the product with an IP address. Requires the
administrator to input a product's MAC hardware address on
the BOOTP server for the product to obtain an IP address from
that server.
Auto IP
For automatic IP address assignment. If neither a DHCP
server nor a BOOTP server is present, the product uses this
service to generate a unique IP address.
ENWW
Supported network protocols 77
Configure network settings
You might need to configure certain network parameters on the product. You can configure these
parameters from the installation software, the product control panel, the embedded Web server, or
management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin.
For more information about supported networks and network configuration tools, see the HP Jetdirect
Print Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server
is installed.
TCP/IP
Similar to a common language that people use to communicate with each other, TCP/IP (Transmission
Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and
other devices communicate with each other over a network.
Internet Protocol (IP)
When information is sent across the network, the data is broken down into small packets. Each packet
is sent independently. Each packet is encoded with IP information, such as the IP address of the sender
and receiver. IP packets can be routed over routers and gateways: devices that connect a network with
other networks.
IP communications require no connection. When IP packets are sent, they might not arrive at their
destination in the correct sequence. However, higher-level protocols and programs place the packets
in the correct sequence, so IP communications are efficient.
Each node or device that communicates on the network requires an IP address.
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
TCP breaks the data into packets and recombines them on the receiving end by providing a connection-
oriented, reliable, and guaranteed delivery service to another node on the network. When data packets
are received at their destination, TCP calculates a checksum for each packet to verify that the data is
not corrupt. If the data in the packet has been corrupted during transmission, TCP discards the packet
and requests that the packet be resent.
IP address
Every host (workstation or node) on an IP network requires a unique IP address for each network
interface. This address is used to identify both the network and specific hosts that are located on that
network. It is possible for a host to query a server for a dynamic IP address each time the product boots
up (for example, using DHCP and BOOTP).
An IP address contains four bytes of information, divided into sections that each contain one byte. The
IP address has the following format:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
NOTE: When assigning IP addresses, always consult the IP address administrator. Setting the wrong
address can disable other equipment operating on the network or interfere with communications.
Configure IP parameters
TCP/IP configuration parameters can be configured manually, or they can be automatically downloaded
by using DHCP or BOOTP each time the product is turned on.
78 Chapter 6 Network configuration
ENWW
When turned on, a new product that is unable to retrieve a valid IP address from the network
automatically assigns itself a default IP address. The IP address for the product is listed on the product
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
DHCP allows a group of devices to use a set of IP addresses that are maintained by a DHCP server.
The product sends a request to the server, and if an IP address is available, the server assigns it to that
product.
BOOTP
BOOTP is a bootstrap protocol used to download configuration parameters and host information from
a network server.
The client broadcasts a boot request packet that contains the product hardware address. The server
answers with a boot reply packet that contains the information that the product needs for configuration.
Subnets
When an IP network address for a particular network class is assigned to an organization, no provision
is made for more than one network being present at that location. Local network administrators use
subnets to partition a network into several different subnetworks. Splitting a network into subnets can
result in better performance and improved use of limited network address space.
Subnet mask
The subnet mask is a mechanism used to divide a single IP network into several different subnetworks.
For a given network class, a portion of an IP address that would normally be used to identify a node is
used, instead, to identify a subnetwork. A subnet mask is applied to each IP address to specify the
portion used for subnetworks, and the portion used to identify the node.
Gateways
Gateways (routers) are used to connect networks together. Gateways are devices that act as translators
between systems that do not use the same communication protocols, data formatting, structures,
languages, or architectures. Gateways repackage the data packets and change the syntax to match
that of the destination system. When networks are divided into subnets, gateways are required to
connect one subnet to another.
Default gateway
The default gateway is the IP address of the gateway or router that moves packets between networks.
If multiple gateways or routers exist, then the default gateway is typically the address of the first, or
nearest, gateway or router. If no gateways or routers exist, then the default gateway will typically assume
the IP address of the network node (such as the workstation or product).
Manually configure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
In addition to using the embedded Web server, you can also use the control-panel menus to set an IPv4
address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
ENWW
Configure network settings 79
3. Press the down arrow to highlight I/O, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU, and then press the
checkmark button
5. Press the checkmark button
6. Press the down arrow to highlight IPV4 SETTINGS, and then press the checkmark button
7. Press the checkmark button to select CONFIG METHOD.
8. Press the down arrow to highlight MANUAL, and then press the checkmark button
.
to select TCP/IP.
.
.
9. Press the down arrow to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS, and then press the checkmark button
.
10. Press the down arrow to highlight IP ADDRESS, and then press the checkmark button
.
-or-
Press the down arrow to highlight SUBNET MASK, and then press the checkmark button
.
-or-
Press the down arrow to highlight DEFAULT GATEWAY, and then press the checkmark button
.
11. Use the numeric keypad, or press the up arrow or the down arrow to increase or decrease the
number for the first byte of the IP address, subnet mask, or default gateway.
12. Press the checkmark button
to move to the next set of numbers. To move to the previous set
.
of numbers, press the back arrow
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 until the IP address, subnet mask, or default gateway is complete, and
then press the checkmark button to save the setting.
14. Press Menu to return to the READY state.
Manually configure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
In addition to using the embedded Web server, you can also use the control-panel menus to set an IPv6
address.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight I/O, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU, and then press the
checkmark button
5. Press the checkmark button
6. Press the down arrow to highlight IPV6 SETTINGS, and then press the checkmark button
7. Press the down arrow to highlight ADDRESS, and then press the checkmark button
.
to select TCP/IP.
.
.
80 Chapter 6 Network configuration
ENWW
8. Press the down arrow to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS, and then press the checkmark button
.
9. Press the down arrow to highlight ENABLE, and then press the checkmark button
10. Press the down arrow to highlight ON, and then press the checkmark button
11. Press the down arrow to highlight ADDRESS, and then press the checkmark button
12. Use the numeric keypad, or press the up arrow or the down arrow to enter the address. Press
.
.
.
the checkmark button
.
NOTE: If you are using the arrow buttons, you must press the checkmark button
after entering
each digit.
13. Press Menu to return to the READY state.
ENWW
Configure network settings 81
Network utilities
The product can be used with several utilities that make it easy to monitor and manage the product on
a network.
●
●
●
Other components and utilities
Windows
Macintosh OS
The HP Printer Utility — change device settings, view
Software installer — automates the printing system
installation
●
●
●
status, and set up printer-event notification from a Mac.
This utility is supported for Mac OS X V10.2 and later.
Online Web registration
82 Chapter 6 Network configuration
ENWW
Understand paper and print media use
This product supports a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this
user guide. Paper or print media that does not meet these guidelines might cause the following problems:
Poor print quality
●
●
●
Increased jams
Premature wear on the product, requiring repair
For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for laserjets or multiuse. Do not
use paper or print media made for inkjet printers. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the
use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce satisfactory
results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels,
or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.
CAUTION: Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard's specifications might
cause problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard
warranty or service agreements.
84 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
Supported paper and print media sizes
NOTE: To obtain best print results, select the appropriate paper size and type in your print driver before
printing.
Table 7-1 Supported paper and print media sizes
Size
Dimensions
Tray 1
Tray 2
Trays 3, 4, 5
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)
279 x 216 mm (11 x 8.5 in)
Letter
Rotated
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in)
297 x 210 mm (11.69 x 8.27 in)
184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 in)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
A4
A4 Rotated
Executive
Executive
(JIS)
A3
297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 in)
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in)
279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in)
A5
11 x 17
12 x 18
B4 (JIS)
RA3
305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in)
257 x 364 mm (10.12 x 14.33 in)
305 x 430 mm (12 x 16.93 in)
320 x 450 mm (12.6 x 17.7 in)
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in)
270 x 390 mm (10.63 x 15.35 in)
195 x 270 mm (7.68 x 10.63 in)
260 x 368 mm (10.2 x 14.5 in)
184 x 260 mm (7.2 x 10.2 in)
273 x 394 mm (10.7 x 15.5 in)
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.7 in)
SRA3
B5 (JIS)
8k
16k
8K
16K
8K
16K
Banner
99 to 320 mm x up to 915 mm (4 to 12.6
x up to 36 in)
Custom
Custom
148 x 210 mm to 297 x 432 mm (5.8 x
8.2 to 11.7 x 17 in)2
148 x 210 mm to 297 x 457 mm (5.8 x
8.2 to 12.6 x 18 in) 3
ENWW
Supported paper and print media sizes 85
Table 7-1 Supported paper and print media sizes (continued)
Size
Dimensions
Tray 1
Tray 2
Trays 3, 4, 5
Custom
99 x 140 mm to 320 x 457 mm (4 x 5.5
to 12.6 x 18 in)3
1
2
Tray automatically detects paper size.
Standard sizes within the custom range for Tray 2 are: 8.5 x 13, RA4, SRA4, 8K (270 x 390), 8K (260 x 368), 8K (7.75 x 10.75),
16K (195 x 270), 16K (184 x 260), and 16K (7.75 x 10.75)
3
Standard sizes within the custom range for Trays 3, 4, and 5 are: 8.5 x 13, RA4, SRA4, 8K (270 x 390), 8K (260 x 368), 8K
(7.75 x 10.75), 16K (195 x 270), 16K (184 x 260), 16K (7.75 x 10.75), RA3, SRA3 , and 12 x 18
Table 7-2 Supported envelopes and postcards
Size
Dimensions
Tray 1
Trays 2, 3, 4, 5
Envelope #9
Envelope #10
Envelope DL
Envelope C5
Envelope B5
Envelope C6
98 x 225 mm (3.88 x 8.88 in)
105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 in)
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in)
162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in)
176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 in)
162 x 114 mm (6.4 x 4.5 in)
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in)
Envelope
Monarch
Post Card
100 x 148 mm (3.94 x 5.83 in)1
Double Post Card 148 x 200 mm (5.83 x 7.87 in)
Postcard (US)
88.9 x 139.7 mm (3.5 x 5.5 in)1
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 in)1
Postcard
(European)
US Index Cards
102 x 152 mm (4 x 6 in), 127 x 177 mm (5 x 7 in), and
127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 in)
1
Weights greater than 160 g/m2 may not perform well, but will not harm the product.
The following paper sizes are supported with the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet
Maker/Finisher accessories.
Table 7-3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet Maker/
Finisher accessories
Size
Dimensions
Stacking2
Angled
Angled
Two staples
Folding
Saddle stitch
staple (left-
angled)
staple (right- (top or side)
angled)
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5
x 11 in)
Letter Rotated 279 x 216 mm (11 x
8.5 in)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5
x 14 in)
86 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
Table 7-3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet Maker/
Finisher accessories (continued)
Size
Dimensions
Stacking2
Angled
Angled
Two staples
Folding
Saddle stitch
staple (left-
angled)
staple (right- (top or side)
angled)
A4
210 x 297 mm (8.27
x 11.69 in)
A4 Rotated
Executive
297 x 210 mm
(11.69 x 8.27 in)
184 x 267 mm (7.24
x 10.51 in)
Executive (JIS) 216 x 330 mm (8.5
x 13 in)
A3
297 x 420 mm
(11.69 x 16.54 in)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.83
x 8.27 in)
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.13
x 5.83 in)
Statement
140 x 216 mm (5.5
x 8.5 in)
11 x 17
(Ledger)
279 x 432 mm (11 x
17 in)
12 x 18
B4 (JIS)
RA3
305 x 457 mm (12 x
18 in)
257 x 364 mm
(10.12 x 14.33 in)
305 x 430 mm (12 x
16.93 in)
SRA3
B5 (JIS)
B6 (JIS)
8K
320 x 450 mm (12.6
x 17.7 in)
257 x 182 mm
(10.12 x 7.17 in)
(128 x 182 mm)
(5.04 x 7.2 in)
270 x 390 mm
(10.63 x 15.35 in)
16K
195 x 270 mm (7.68
x 10.63 in)
8K
260 x 368 mm (10.2
x 14.5 in)
16K
184 x 260 mm (7.2
x 10.2 in)
8K
273 x 393.7 mm
(10.75 x 15.5 in)
16K
196.8 x 273 mm
(7.75 x 10.75 in)
ENWW
Supported paper and print media sizes 87
Table 7-3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet Maker/
Finisher accessories (continued)
Size
Dimensions
Stacking2
Angled
Angled
Two staples
Folding
Saddle stitch
staple (left-
angled)
staple (right- (top or side)
angled)
Banner
(99 to 320 x up to
915 mm) (12.9 x
36 in)
Envelope 9#
Envelope 10#
Envelope DL
Envelope C5
Envelope B5
Envelope C6
98.4 x 225.4 mm
(3.88 x 8.88 in)
104.77 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in)
110 x 220 mm (4.33
x 8.66 in)
162 x 229 mm (6.38
x 9.02 in)
176 x 250 mm (6.93
x 9.84 in)
114 x 162 mm (4.49
x 6.38 in)
Envelope
Monarch
98.42 x 190.5 mm
(3.88 x 7.5 in)
Double Post
Card
148 x 200 mm (5.83
x 7.87 in)
1
2
Booklet maker only
Stacking uses bins 1, 2, and 3 in the stapler/stacker, or bins 1 and 2 in the booklet maker.
88 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
Supported paper types
Table 7-4 Tray 1 paper information
Type
Specifications
Quantity
Driver settings
Paper orientation
Paper and cardstock,
standard sizes
Range:
Maximum stack height: Plain or unspecified
10 mm (0.6 in)
Load preprinted or
prepunched paper
facing down, with the
bottom edge leading
into the tray, or toward
the front of the product
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
Equivalent to 100
sheets of 75 g/m2 (20
lb) bond.
Less than 60 g/m2 (16
lb) bond to 90 g/m2 (24
lb) bond
Envelopes
Up to 10 envelopes
Envelope
Short edge leading,
flap toward the back of
the product, facing up
Labels
Maximum 0.23 mm
(0.009 in) thick
Maximum stack height: Labels
10 mm (0.6 in)
Side to be printed on
facing down
Transparencies
Heavy
Minimum 0.13 mm
(0.005 in) thick
Maximum stack height: Transparencies
10 mm (0.6 in)
Side to be printed on
facing down
0.13 mm (0.005 in)
thick
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on
10 mm (0.6 in) heavy glossy facing down
Glossy
Range:
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on
10 mm (0.6 in) heavy glossy facing down
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
Photo media
Cut sheet paper
Tough paper
Banner paper
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on
10 mm (0.6 in)
heavy glossy
facing down
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: Plain or unspecified
10 mm (0.6 in)
Side to be printed on
facing down
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: HP Tough paper
10 mm (0.6 in)
Side to be printed on
facing down
Range:
Maximum stack height: Plain or unspecified
10 mm (0.6 in)
Side to be printed on
facing down
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
CAUTION: Do not use banner media heavier than 120 g/m2 with the optional 3–bin stapler/stacker or
the optional booklet maker finisher. Heavy banner media is not supported for these products.
Table 7-5 Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 paper information
Type
Specifications
Quantity
Driver Settings
Paper orientation
500 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) bond.
Paper and cardstock,
standard sizes
Range:
Plain or unspecified
Load preprinted or
prepunched paper
facing up, with the top
toward the front of the
tray or toward the left-
hand side of the tray.
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
Labels
Maximum 0.13 mm
(0.005 in) thick
Maximum stack height: Labels
54 mm (2.1 in)
Side to be printed on
facing up
Transparencies
Minimum 0.13 mm
(0.005 in) thick
Maximum stack height: Transparencies
54 mm (2.1 in)
Side to be printed on
facing up
ENWW
Supported paper types 89
Table 7-5 Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 paper information (continued)
Type
Specifications
Quantity
Driver Settings
Paper orientation
Heavy
0.13 mm (0.005 in)
thick
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on
54 mm (2.1 in) heavy glossy facing up
Glossy
Range:
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on
54 mm (2.1 in) heavy glossy facing up
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
Photo media
Cut sheet paper
Tough paper
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on
54 mm (2.1 in)
heavy glossy
facing up
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: Plain or unspecified
54 mm (2.1 in)
Side to be printed on
facing up
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: HP Tough paper
54 mm (2.1 in)
Side to be printed on
facing up
Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 capacity: 54 mm (2.126 in) height or 500 sheets of paper, whichever is less.
Supported media types include: Cut sheet paper, labels, OHT, glossy paper, glossy film, photo media,
and tough paper. Basis Weight: 60-220 g/m2 (16-58 lb).
Duplex printing: Provides automatic two-sided printing (printing on both sides of the paper). Not
available on the HP Color LaserJet CP6015n model, which cannot be upgraded to duplex printing. The
paper size range for automatic duplex printing is 175 to 320 mm (6.9 to 12.6 in) x 210 to 457 mm (8.3
to 18 in). The media weight range is 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb)
NOTE: HP Color Laser Presentation Paper, Glossy (Q2546A, Q2547A) is not supported with this
product. Using this type of paper can cause a fuser jam that might require the replacement of the fuser.
Two recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper, Soft Gloss (Q6541A) and
HP Color LaserJet Brochure Paper, Glossy (Q6611A, Q6610A).
90 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
Special paper or print media guidelines
This product supports printing on special media. Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory
results. When using special paper or print media, be sure to set the type and size in your print driver to
obtain the best print results.
CAUTION: HP LaserJet printers use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise
dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper not designed for this
technology could damage your printer.
Media type
Do
Do not
Envelopes
Store envelopes flat.
Do not use envelopes that are
wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or
otherwise damaged.
●
●
●
Use envelopes where the seam
extends all the way to the corner of
the envelope.
Do not use envelopes that have
clasps, snaps, windows, or coated
linings.
●
Use peel-off adhesive strips that
are approved for use in laser
printers.
●
Do not use self-stick adhesives or
other synthetic materials.
●
●
●
Labels
Use only labels that have no
exposed backing between them.
Do not use labels that have wrinkles
or bubbles, or are damaged.
●
Use Labels that lie flat.
Do not print partial sheets of labels.
●
●
●
Use only full sheets of labels.
Transparencies
Use only transparencies that are
approved for use in laser printers.
Do not use transparent print media
not approved for laser printers.
●
Place transparencies on a flat
surface after removing them from
the product.
●
Letterhead or preprinted forms
Heavy paper
Use only letterhead or forms
approved for use in laser printers.
Do not use raised or metallic
letterhead.
●
●
●
●
Use only heavy paper that is
approved for use in laser printers
and meets the weight specifications
for this product.
Do not use paper that is heavier
than the recommended media
specification for this product unless
it is HP paper that has been
approved for use in this product.
Glossy or coated paper
Use only glossy or coated paper
that is approved for use in laser
printers.
Do not use glossy or coated paper
designed for use in inkjet products.
●
●
ENWW
Special paper or print media guidelines 91
Load paper and print media
You can load different media in the trays and then request media by type or size by using the control
panel.
Load Tray 1
CAUTION: To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing.
1. Open Tray 1.
2. Set the side guides to the correct width, and pull out the tray extensions to support paper.
3. Load paper in the tray with the side to be printed on face down and the top of the paper or non-
postage end facing the front of the printer.
NOTE: For Letter Rotated and A4 Rotated sizes, place the side to be printed on face down, with
the top of the page facing into the printer.
4. Make sure the stack fits under the tabs on the guides and does not exceed the load-level indicators.
5. Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend it.
92 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
Print envelopes
If your software does not automatically format an envelope, specify Landscape for page orientation in
your software program or printer driver. Use the following guidelines to set margins for return and
destination addresses on Commercial #10 or DL envelopes:
Address type
Left margin
Top margin
Return
15 mm (0.6 in)
102 mm (4 in)
15 mm (0.6 in)
51 mm (2 in)
Destination
For envelopes of other sizes, adjust the margin settings accordingly.
Load banner paper into Tray 1
You can print banners from 457 mm (18 in) to 915 mm (36 in) in length and from 99 mm (4 in) to 320
CAUTION: Do not use banner media heavier than 120 g/m2 with the optional 3–bin stapler/stacker or
the optional booklet maker finisher. Heavy banner media is not supported for these products.
Load Trays 2, 3, 4, or 5
Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 each hold up to 500 sheets of standard paper or a 54 mm (2.13 in) stack of labels
or other thick paper.
Load standard-sized paper into Trays 2, 3, 4, or 5
The product automatically detects the following standard sizes of paper in the 500-sheet trays: Letter,
Letter Rotated, Legal, Executive, 11x17, A3, A4, A4 Rotated, A5, B4 (JIS), and B5 (JIS).
CAUTION: Do not print envelopes or unsupported sizes of paper from the 500-sheet trays. Print on
these types of paper only from Tray 1.
1. Slide the tray from the product.
NOTE: Do not open the input tray while it is in use. Doing so can cause jams in the product.
ENWW
Load paper and print media 93
2. Adjust the paper-width guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size
of the paper being used.
3. Adjust the paper-length guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size
of the paper being used.
94 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
4. Load paper into the tray face up. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but
do not bend it.
NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overfill the input tray. Be sure the top of the stack is below the
tray full indicator.
NOTE: For best performance, fill the tray completely without splitting the ream of paper. Splitting
the ream can cause a multifeed problem. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if
you are using 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier,
the tray will not hold a full ream. Do not overfill the tray.
NOTE: If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an error message might appear or the media might
jam.
5. Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the tray’s media type and size. If the
configuration is not correct, press the checkmark button
is correct, press the back arrow
on the control panel. If the configuration
.
Load undetectable standard-sized paper into Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5
The following undetectable standard-sized media is supported in the 500-sheet trays:
Executive (JIS) (8.5 x 13)
12 x 18 (Trays 3, 4, or 5 only)
B4 (ISO)
●
●
●
●
RA3 (Trays 3, 4, or 5 only)
ENWW
Load paper and print media 95
SRA3 (Trays 3, 4, or 5 only)
B5 (ISO)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
RA4
SRA4
8K 270 x 390 mm
16K 195 x 270 mm
8K 260 x 368 mm
16K 184 x 260 mm
8K 273 x 394 mm
16K 197 x 273 mm
CAUTION: Do not print envelopes or unsupported sizes of paper from the 500-sheet trays. Print on
these types of paper only from Tray 1. Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so
can cause paper jams.
Load custom-size paper into Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5
To use custom media, change the size setting on the control panel to CUSTOM and set the unit of
measure, X dimension, and Y dimension. See Configure a tray to match print job settings
on page 99 for more information.
1. Slide open the tray from the product.
2. Load the print media as described in steps 2 through 4 of the “Load detectable (standard-size)
media into Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5” section. Then proceed to step 3 in this procedure.
96 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
3. Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the tray type and size configuration. To
specify custom dimensions, or if the type is not correct, press the checkmark button
control panel prompts to change the size or type.
when the
4. Select CUSTOM, and then input the X and Y dimensions of the custom paper size.
NOTE: Refer to the label in the paper tray, or to the figure below, to determine the X and Y
dimensions.
X
Y
5. If the configuration is correct, press the back arrow
.
Load large-size paper into Tray 3, 4, or 5
Use the following instructions if you are loading 11x17, RA3, SRA3, or 12 x 18-sized paper into Tray 3,
4, or 5.
1. Slide open Tray 3, 4, or 5.
2. Adjust the paper width guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size
of the paper being used.
3. Load the paper into the tray.
4. Move the paper stop lever to the correct position for the paper being used.
ENWW
Load paper and print media 97
For SRA3-sized paper, rotate the lever all the way to the left.
●
●
●
For A3- or 11x17-sized paper, rotate the lever down into the center position.
For RA3- or 12x18-sized paper, rotate the lever all the way to the right.
5. Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the tray’s media type and size. If the
configuration is not correct, press the checkmark button . If the configuration is correct, press
the back arrow
.
98 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
Configure trays
The product automatically prompts you to configure a tray for type and size in the following situations:
When you load paper into the tray
●
●
When you specify a particular tray or media type for a print job through the printer driver or a
software program and the tray is not configured to match the print-job’s settings
The following message appears on the control panel:Tray <X> [type] [size] To change size or type
press the checkmark button . To accept settings press the back arrow
.
NOTE: The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and it is configured for ANY
CUSTOM and ANY TYPE.
NOTE: If you have used other HP LaserJet product models, you might be accustomed to configuring
Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. For this product, setting Tray 1 size to ANY CUSTOM is
equivalent to First mode. Setting size for Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY CUSTOM is equivalent to
Cassette mode.
Configure a tray when loading paper
1. Load paper in the tray. Close the tray if you are using Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.
2. The tray configuration message appears.
3. Press the back arrow to accept the detected size, or press the checkmark button
to choose
a different paper size.
4. If you are modifying the tray configuration, press the down arrow to highlight the correct size,
and then press the checkmark button
.
NOTE: The product automatically detects most paper sizes in Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5.
5. If you are modifying the tray configuration, press the down arrow to highlight the correct type,
and then press the checkmark button
.
Configure a tray to match print job settings
1. In the software program, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type.
2. Send the job to the product.
If the tray needs to be configured, the LOAD TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE> message appears.
3. Load the tray with the specified type and size of paper, and then close the tray. Press the down
arrow to highlight the correct size, or highlight CUSTOM.
To specify a custom size, first press the down arrow to highlight the correct unit of measure.
Then use the numeric keypad to set the X and Y dimensions.
4. When the TRAY<X> SIZE=<SIZE> message appears, press the checkmark button
to confirm
the size.
5. When the TRAY<X> TYPE=<TYPE> message appears, press the checkmark button
to confirm
the type and continue with the job.
ENWW
Configure trays 99
Configure a tray by using the Paper Handling menu
You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the product.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight PAPER HANDLING, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight the size or type setting for the desired tray, and then press the
checkmark button
.
4. Press the up arrow or the down arrow to highlight the size or type. If you select a custom size,
select the unit of measure, and then use the numeric keypad to set the X dimension and the Y
dimension.
5. Press the checkmark button
6. Press the back arrow
7. Press the back arrow again.
to save your selection.
.
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode)
The automatic media type sensor functions only when that tray is configured to ANY TYPE. Configuring
a tray to any other type, such as Bond or Glossy, deactivates the media sensor in that tray.
The HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series printers can automatically classify many paper types into one of
the following categories:
Plain
●
●
●
●
●
Transparency
Glossy
Glossy film (tough paper)
Heavy
For more control, a specific type must be selected in the job or configured in a tray.
Auto-sense settings
Full sensing (available only for tray 1)
The product recognizes plain and heavy paper, transparencies, glossy paper, and tough paper.
●
●
●
Each time the product begins a print job, it stops the every page to sense the type.
This is the slowest mode.
Expanded sensing (default) (available for all trays)
The product recognizes plain and heavy paper, transparencies, glossy paper, and tough paper.
Each time the product begins a print job, it stops the first page to sense the type.
●
●
100 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
The product assumes that the second and all subsequent pages are of the same media type as
the first page.
●
●
This is the second-fastest mode, and is useful for using stacks of the same media type.
Transparency only
The product does not stop any pages for sensing but distinguishes between transparencies
(Transparency mode) and paper (Normal mode).
●
This is the fastest mode and is useful for high-volume printing in Normal mode.
●
For more information about setting these options, see Print Quality menu on page 22
Select the media by source, type, or size
In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull media
when you send a print job. Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or Print
Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. Unless you change these settings, the product
automatically selects a tray using the default settings.
Source
To print by Source select a specific tray for the product to pull from. If you select a tray that is configured
for a type or size that does not match your print job, the product prompts you to load the tray with the
type or size of print media for your print job before printing it. When you load the tray, the product begins
printing.
Type and Size
Printing by Type or Size means that you want the product to pull from the tray that is loaded with the
correct type and size of media. Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking out trays
and helps protect special media from accidental use. For example, if a tray is configured for letterhead
and you select plain paper, the product will not pull the letterhead from that tray. Instead, it will pull from
a tray that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain paper on the product control panel. Selecting
media by Type and Size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper, glossy paper, and
transparencies. Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by Type
for special print media, such as labels or transparencies. Print by Size for envelopes, if possible.
To print by Type or Size, select the type or size from the Page Setup dialog box, the Print dialog
box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the software program.
●
If you often print on a certain type or size of media, configure a tray for that type or size. Then,
when you select that type or size as you print a job, the product automatically pulls media from the
tray that is configured for that type or size.
●
ENWW
Configure trays 101
Choose an output location
Standard output bin
The product has a standard output bin for printed pages.
When you send print jobs to the product from a computer, the output is routed to the standard output
bin or to one of the output bins on the optional 3-bin stapler/stacker or booklet maker finisher.
Optional output accessories
An optional stapler/stacker or booklet maker can be installed with the product. When an accessory is
installed, an output accessory bridge is also added on top of the product in order to route the print jobs
to the accessory output bins.
3-bin stapler/stacker features
Table 7-6 3-bin stapler/stacker features
Job offset
Each copy of a job is shifted to one side in the output bin in order to keep each copy separate
from the others. (Supported paper sizes: A3, A4, A4 rotated, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Legal, Letter,
Letter rotated, Statement.)
Two operation modes
Stapler
Mailbox Mode assigns each bin to a user or group of users, and Stacker Mode uses all three
output bins for all print jobs — when one bin is full, jobs are routed to the next bin.
Built-in stapler staples jobs up to 50 sheets in size. Pages can be stapled in one position at
the front, in one position at the back, or at two positions at the side or top.
Large-capacity output bins
The stacker has three bins: a 100-sheet bin, a 500-sheet bin, and a 1000-sheet bin.
Booklet maker finisher features
Table 7-7 Booklet-maker finisher features
Booklet-making
The booklet-making feature staples and folds print jobs of 2 to 15 pages into a booklet.
102 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
Table 7-7 Booklet-maker finisher features (continued)
Folding
Single-sheet print jobs can be automatically folded in the center.
Job offset
Each copy of a job is shifted to one side in the output bin in order to keep each copy separate
from the others. (Supported paper sizes: A3, A4, A4 rotated, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Legal, Letter,
Letter rotated, Statement.)
Two operation modes
Stapler
Mailbox Mode assigns each bin to a user or group of users, and Stacker Mode uses both
output bins for all print jobs — when the top bin is full, jobs are routed to the next bin.
Built-in stapler staples jobs up to 50 sheets in size. Pages can be stapled in one position at
the front, in one position at the back, or at two positions at the side or top.
Large-capacity output bins
The stacker has three bins: two 1000-sheet bins and one bin that can hold up to 25 saddle-
stitched booklets.
Accessory walkaround
Figure 7-1 3-bin stapler/stacker accessory
4
5
2
3
1
1
2
3
4
5
Output bins
Front door
Stapler unit
Top cover
Connection cable
ENWW
Choose an output location 103
Figure 7-2 3–bin stapler/stacker accessory dimensions
54 kg
119 lb
6 mm
2
6
1
4 in)
(6
5 mm
2
(
3
6
5 in)
Figure 7-3 Booklet-maker finisher accessory
5
6
4
2
3
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Booklet output bin
Stacking output bins
Front door
Stapler units
Top cover
Connection cable
104 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
Figure 7-4 Booklet maker finisher dimensions
75 kg
165.3 lb
m
m
6
2
16
mm
)
n
4 i
(6
635
5 in)
2
(
Configure the accessory operation mode
Select the operating mode at the control panel
You can set the operating mode for the 3-bin stapler/stacker or the booklet maker finisher at the product
control panel.
1. At the control panel, press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then press the
checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight the MBM-3 BIN STAPLER menu or MULTIFUNCT
FINISHER, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight OPERATION MODE, and then press the checkmark button
.
5. Select the operation mode that you want to use.
When Mailbox Mode is used, each bin is assigned to a user or group of users. Every time a
user sends a print job, the job is routed to the assigned bin.
●
When Stacker Mode is used and the optional 3-bin stapler/stacker is installed, the three bins
act as a single bin. When one bin is full, jobs are automatically routed to the next bin. When
Stacker Mode is used and the booklet maker finisher is installed, the two upper bins act as a
single bin, and the third bin is reserved for booklets.
●
NOTE: Use the product embedded Web server to assign output bins to users or groups of users.
For more information see Embedded Web server on page 142
ENWW
Choose an output location 105
Select the operating mode in the printer driver (Windows)
1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers
and Faxes (for Windows XP).
2. Right-click the HP product icon, and then click Properties or Printing Preferences.
3. Click the Device Settings tab.
4. Perform one of the following actions:
For automatic configuration: under Installable Options, click Update Now in the Automatic
Configuration list.
-or-
For manual configuration: under Installable Options, select the appropriate operation mode in the
Accessory Output Bin list.
5. Click Apply to save the settings.
Select the operating mode in the printer driver (Mac OS X)
1. In the Apple menu, click System Preferences.
2. In the System Preferences box, click Print and Fax.
3. Click Set Up Printers. A Printer List displays.
4. Select the HP product, and then click Show Info on the Printers menu.
5. Select the Installable Options panel.
6. In the Accessory Output Bins list, select correct accessory.
7. In the Mailbox Mode list, select the appropriate operational mode, and then click Apply
Changes.
106 Chapter 7 Paper and print media
ENWW
Economy settings
You can adjust economy settings from the control panel or from the embedded Web server (EWS).
Sleep delay
The adjustable sleep mode feature reduces power consumption when the product has been inactive for
an extended period. You can set the length of time before the product enters sleep mode to
1 MINUTE, 15 MINUTES, 30 MINUTES, 45 MINUTES, 60 MINUTES, 90 MINUTES, 2 HOURS, or
4 HOURS. The default setting is 60 MINUTES.
NOTE: The product display dims when the product is in sleep mode. This mode does not affect product
warm-up time.
Set sleep delay
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight SLEEP DELAY, and then press the checkmark button
.
5. Press the up or down arrow
6. Press the checkmark button
7. Press Menu.
/
to select the appropriate time period.
to set the time period.
Disable/enable sleep mode
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight RESETS, and then press the checkmark button
4. Press the down arrow to highlight SLEEP MODE, and then press the checkmark button
5. Press the up arrow or down arrow / to select LOW, HIGH, or OFF. HIGH saves the most energy.
.
.
6. Press the checkmark button
to save the selection.
7. Press Menu.
Wake time
The wake time feature allows you to instruct the product to wake at a certain time on selected days, to
eliminate waiting for the warm-up and calibration periods. You must have SLEEP MODE on to set the
wake time.
To set or change the wake time, use the following steps:
108 Chapter 8 Use product features
ENWW
Set the wake time
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and then press the checkmark button
4. Press the down arrow to highlight WAKE TIME, and then press the checkmark button
5. Press the up arrow or down arrow / to select the day of the week, and then press the checkmark
.
.
button
.
6. Press the down arrow to select CUSTOM, and then press the checkmark button
.
7. Press the up arrow or down arrow
/
to select the hour, and then press the checkmark button
.
8. Press the up arrow or down arrow / to select the minutes, and then press the checkmark button
.
9. Press the up arrow or down arrow
/
to select AM or PM, and then press the checkmark button
.
10. Press the checkmark button
to enter APPLY TO ALL DAYS.
to select YES or NO, and then press the checkmark button
11. Press the up arrow or down arrow
/
.
12. If you select NO, use the up arrow or down arrow
/
to set the WAKE TIME for the other days of
the week, and then press the checkmark button
to accept each selection.
13. Press Menu.
Set economy modes from the EWS
2. Click Settings and then Wake Time.
3. Set the wake time for each day of the week.
4. Set the sleep delay for the product.
5. Click Apply.
ENWW
Economy settings 109
Use the stapler
The automatic stapler is only available with the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker or HP booklet Maker/
Finisher Accessory.
Print jobs can be stapled with a diagonal staple in either top corner, with two horizontal staples at the
top of the page, or with two vertical staples at either side of the page.
Paper weight can range from 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 148 lbs.). Heavier paper might have a stapling
limit of fewer than 50 sheets.
●
●
●
The optional stapler/stacker can staple jobs of up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. It can stack
up to 1,000 sheets of paper, or 30 stapled jobs, whichever is less.
The optional booklet maker can also staple jobs of up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. It can
staple and fold up to 15 pages into a booklet. It can stack up to 1,000 sheets of paper, (or 30 stapled
jobs) or up to 25 saddle-stitched booklets.
If the job consists of only one sheet, or if it consists of more than 50 sheets, the product delivers
the job to the bin, but does not staple the job.
●
●
The stapler supports paper only. Do not try to staple other types of print media, such as envelopes,
transparencies, or labels.
When you want the product to staple or fold a document, select the correct option in the software. You
can usually select the stapler in your program or printer driver, although some options might be available
only in the printer driver. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or printer driver.
If you cannot select the stapler or booklet maker finisher in the program or printer driver, select it at the
product control panel.
The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples, but it does not staple the pages. The product can be
configured to stop printing if the staple cartridge is empty.
Supported paper sizes for stapling
In order to staple a print job, you must use a supported paper size and orientation.
Corner, angled staples are supported with the following paper sizes: A4, A4 Rotated, Letter, Letter
Rotated, Legal, A3, 11 x 17, and B4 (JIS).
Two staples at the top or side of the print job are supported with the following paper sizes: A4, Letter,
Legal, A3, 11 x 17, and B4 (JIS).
Saddle-stitch stapling with the booklet maker is supported with these sizes: A4 Rotated, Letter Rotated,
Legal, A3, 11 x 17, and B4 (JIS).
The paper must also be loaded into the paper trays with the correct orientation. The arrows in the
following graphic indicate the direction the paper moves through the product paper path.
110 Chapter 8 Use product features
ENWW
A4
LTR
A4
LTR
A4
LTR
If the correct paper size or orientation is not used, the print job will print, but it will not be stapled.
ENWW
Use the stapler 111
Staple print jobs
Select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Windows)
1. Select Print from the File menu of your software program.
2. Select the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series printer, and then click Properties or Printing
Preferences.
3. From the Staple drop-down list, select a staple option.
4. Click OK to save the settings and OK to print.
NOTE: You can create a Shortcut with the appropriate settings.
Select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Macintosh)
Select the stapler by creating a new preset in the printer driver.
2. Create the new preset.
Configure the product to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty
You can specify whether the product stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it continues
printing but does not staple the jobs.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then press the
checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight MBM-3 BIN STAPLER or MULTIFUNC FINISHER, and then
press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight STAPLES OUT menu, and then press the checkmark button
.
5. Press the down arrow to select the option that you want to use:
Select STOP to stop all printing until the staple cartridge is replaced.
●
●
Select CONTINUE to continue printing jobs without stapling them.
112 Chapter 8 Use product features
ENWW
Use job storage features
The following job-storage features are available for print jobs:
Proof and hold jobs: This feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of
a job and then print the additional copies.
●
●
●
Personal jobs: When you send a private job to the product, the job does not print until you provide
the required personal identification number (PIN) at the control panel.
Quick Copy jobs: You can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store a copy of
the job on the product hard disk. Storing the job allows you to print additional copies of the job later.
The Quick Copy jobs feature requires that a hard disk be installed with the product.
Stored jobs: You can store a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar on the product
and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs also can be protected by a PIN. The
Stored jobs feature requires that a hard disk be installed with the product.
●
Follow the instructions in this section to gain access to the job storage features at the computer. See
the specific section for the type of job that you want to create.
CAUTION: If you turn off the product, all Quick Copy, proof and hold, and personal jobs are deleted.
Gain access to the job storage features
For Windows
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Click Properties, and then click the Job Storage tab.
3. Select the job storage mode that you want.
For Macintosh
In newer drivers: Select Job Storage in the pull-down menu in the Print dialog box. In older drivers,
select Printer Specific Options.
Use the proof and hold feature
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job and then
to print the additional copies.
To permanently store the job and prevent the product from deleting it when space is needed for
something else, select the Stored Job option in the driver.
Create a proof and hold job
CAUTION: If the device needs additional space to store newer proof and hold jobs, the device deletes
other stored proof and hold jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent
the device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Stored Job option in the driver instead of
the Proof and Hold option.
In the driver, select the Proof and Hold option and type a user name and job name.
The device prints one copy of the job for you to proof.
ENWW
Use job storage features 113
Print a proof and hold job
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight your USER NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight a JOB NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
PRINT is highlighted.
5. Press the checkmark button
6. Press the up arrow or down arrow
7. Press the checkmark button to print the job.
to select PRINT.
to select the number of copies.
Delete a proof and hold job
When you send a stored job, the product overwrites any previous jobs with the same user and job name.
If there is not a job already stored under the same user and job name, and the product needs additional
space, the product may delete other stored jobs starting with the oldest. The default number of jobs that
can be stored is 32. You can change the number of jobs that can be stored from the control panel. For
A job can be deleted from the control panel, from the embedded Web server, or from HP Web Jetadmin.
To delete a job from the control panel, use the following procedure:
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight your USER NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight a JOB NAME, and then press the down arrow
.
5. Press the down arrow to highlight DELETE, and then press the checkmark button
.
6. Press the checkmark button
to delete the job.
114 Chapter 8 Use product features
ENWW
Use the personal job feature
Use the personal job feature to specify that a job is not printed until you release it. Your job will be stored
on the product and nothing will be printed until you request the job from the product's control panel.
Once the job is printed, it will be automatically removed from the product's job storage. Personal jobs
can be stored with or without a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN). To make the job private, a
PIN must be used.
For information on creating a personal job, see Store jobs on page 68 for Macintosh and Set job storage
options on page 127 for Windows.
Print a personal job
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight your USER NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight a JOB NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
PRINT is highlighted.
5. Press the checkmark button
to select PRINT.
6. If a PIN is required, use the keypad on the control panel to type in the PIN, and then press the
checkmark button
.
7. Press the up arrow or down arrow
to select the number of copies, and then press the checkmark
button to print the job.
Delete a personal job
A personal job can be deleted from the product control panel. You can delete a job without printing it,
or it will be automatically deleted after it is printed.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight your USER NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight a JOB NAME, and then press the checkmark button
5. Press the down arrow to highlight DELETE, and then press the checkmark button
6. Use the keypad on the control panel to type in the PIN, and then press the checkmark button
7. Press the checkmark button to delete the job.
.
.
.
ENWW
Use job storage features 115
Use the Quick Copy feature
The Quick Copy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job and stores a copy on the product
hard disk. Additional copies of the job can be printed later. This feature can be turned off in the printer
driver.
The default number of different Quick Copy jobs that can be stored on the product is 32. At the control
Create a QuickCopy job
CAUTION: If the device needs additional space to store newer QuickCopy jobs, the device deletes
other stored QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent the
device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Job Storage option in the driver instead of the
QuickCopy option.
In the driver, select the QuickCopy option, and then type a user name and a job name.
When you send the job to print, the device prints the number of copies that you set in the driver. To print
Printing a Quick Copy job
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight your USER NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight a JOB NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
PRINT is highlighted.
5. Press the checkmark button
6. Press the up arrow or down arrow
7. Press the checkmark button to print the job.
to select PRINT.
to select the number of copies.
Delete a Quick Copy job
Delete a Quick Copy job at the product control panel when you no longer need it. If the product requires
additional space to store new Quick Copy jobs, the product automatically deletes other stored Quick
Copy jobs, starting with the oldest job.
A job can be deleted from the control panel, from the embedded Web server, or from HP Web Jetadmin.
To delete a job from the control panel, use the following procedure:
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight your USER NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight a JOB NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
116 Chapter 8 Use product features
ENWW
5. Press the down arrow to highlight DELETE, and then press the checkmark button
.
6. Press the checkmark button
to delete the job.
Use the stored job feature
You can save a print job to the product hard disk without printing it. You can then print the job at any
time at the product control panel. For example, you might want to download a personnel form, calendar,
time sheet, or accounting form that other users can print when they need it.
Create a stored print job
In the driver, select the Stored Job option, and then type a user name and job name. The job does not
Print a stored job
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight your USER NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight a JOB NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
PRINT is highlighted.
5. Press the checkmark button
to select PRINT.
6. If a PIN was used, use the keypad on the control panel to type in the PIN, and then press the
checkmark button
7. Press the up arrow or down arrow
8. Press the checkmark button to print the job.
.
to select the number of copies.
Delete a stored job
Jobs stored on the product can be deleted at the control panel.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight your USER NAME, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight a JOB NAME, and then press the checkmark button
5. Press the down arrow to highlight DELETE, and then press the checkmark button
6. Press the checkmark button to delete the job.
.
.
ENWW
Use job storage features 117
Banner printing
The product allows printing of banner-sized paper from Tray 1. You can print banners from 457 mm (18
in) to 915 mm (36 in) in length and from 99 mm (4 in) to 320 mm (12.6 in) in width. When printing a
banner from your graphics software program, you must set up a custom page size.
CAUTION: Do not use banner media heavier than 120 g/m2 with the optional 3–bin stapler/stacker or
the optional booklet maker finisher. Heavy banner media is not supported for these products.
Print banners from Tray 1
1. Select Print from the File menu of your software program.
2. Select the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series printer, and then click Properties or Printing
Preferences.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. Under Paper Options, click Custom.
5. Type a name, the width, and the length of the custom paper size, and then click OK and then
OK again to save the new custom paper size.
6. Click Properties or Printing Preferences again and then select the new custom paper size in the
Paper Sizes list.
7. Click OK and then OK again to print the banner.
8. Go to the product to load the banner paper. The control panel displays the paper size and prompts
you to load the banner into Tray 1.
9. Gently place the leading edge of the banner into Tray 1. Hold it there until product starts to pull the
paper in.
NOTE: Hold the paper steady against the paper sensor of Tray 1 until it feeds into the product.
Moving the paper in an out may cause the product to jam.
10. After the product begins pulling the banner in, let go of the paper and let the banner feed through
118 Chapter 8 Use product features
ENWW
Print photos or marketing material
You can use the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series printer to print high-quality color photos, marketing
and sales material, or other color documents on glossy paper. To maximize the quality of this output
you must do the following:
Choose the appropriate paper
●
●
●
Configure the paper tray correctly
Choose the correct settings in the print driver
Supported glossy paper
HP glossy paper product
Product code
Product size
Control panel and print
driver settings
HP Color Laser Presentation Q6541A
Paper, Soft Gloss
Letter
HP soft gloss 120 g
HP soft gloss 120 g
HP glossy 160 g
HP glossy 160 g
HP glossy 220 g
HP glossy 220 g
HP glossy 220 g
HP glossy 220 g
HP Color Laser Professional Q6542A
Paper, Soft Gloss
A4
HP Color Laser Brochure
Paper, Glossy
Q6611A, Q6610A
Letter
HP Color Laser Superior
Paper, Glossy
Q6616A
A4
HP Color Laser Photo Paper, Q6607A, Q6608A
Glossy
Letter
HP Color Laser Photo Paper, Q6614A
Glossy
A4
HP Color Laser Photo Paper, Q8842A
Glossy 4x6
101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in)
101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in)
HP Color Laser Photo Paper, Q8843A
Glossy 10 cm x 15 cm
CAUTION: HP Color Laser Presentation Paper, Glossy (Q2546A, Q2547A) is not supported with this
product. Using this type of paper can cause a fuser jam that might require the replacement of the fuser.
Two recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper, Soft Gloss (Q6541A) and
HP Color LaserJet Brochure Paper, Glossy (Q6611A, Q6610A).
Configure the paper tray
Configure the paper tray for the correct paper type.
1. Load the paper into Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.
2. After you close the tray, the control panel prompts you to configure the paper size and type. Press
the checkmark button
to configure the size and type.
ENWW
Print photos or marketing material 119
3. If the correct size is displayed, press the checkmark button
or down arrow to choose a different paper size.
to accept the size, or press the up
4. When the paper type prompt appears, press the up or down arrow
to highlight the correct
paper type and then press the checkmark button
the correct paper type.
to select it. See the table above to determine
Configure the driver settings
Carry out the following steps to print on glossy paper from your graphics software program.
1. Select Print from the File menu of your software program.
2. Select the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series printer, and then click Properties or Printing
Preferences.
3. From the Paper type drop-down list, select the same paper type that you configured on the product
control panel.
4. Click OK to save the settings and OK to print. The print job will automatically be printed from the
tray that has been configured for glossy paper.
120 Chapter 8 Use product features
ENWW
Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs
You can use the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series to print durable, waterproof maps, signs, or menus
by using HP Tough Paper. HP Tough Paper is a waterproof, tear-proof, satin finish paper that retains
rich, vibrant print color and clarity even when exposed to heavy usage or weather. This avoids expensive
and time-consuming lamination. To maximize the quality of this output you must do the following:
Choose the appropriate paper
●
●
●
Configure the paper tray correctly
Choose the correct settings in the print driver
Supported tough paper
HP paper name
Product code
Product size
Control panel and print
driver settings
HP LaserJet Tough Paper
HP LaserJet Tough Paper
Q1298A
Q1298B
Letter
A4
HP Tough Paper
HP Tough Paper
Configure the paper tray
Configure the paper tray for the correct paper type.
1. Load the paper into Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.
2. After you close the tray, the control panel prompts you to configure the paper size and type. Press
the checkmark button to configure the size and type.
3. If the correct size is displayed, press the checkmark button
the up or down arrow to choose a different paper size.
to accept the detected size, or press
4. When the paper type prompt appears, press the up or down arrow
to highlight the correct
paper type and then press the checkmark button
the correct paper type.
to select it. See the table above to determine
Configure the driver settings
Carry out the following steps to print to tough paper from your graphics software program.
1. Select Print from the File menu of your software program.
2. Select the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series printer, and then click Properties or Printing
Preferences.
3. From the Paper type drop-down list, select the same paper type that you configured on the product
control panel.
4. Click OK to save the settings and OK to print. The print job will automatically be printed from the
tray that has been configured for tough paper.
ENWW
Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs 121
Set the duplex alignment
For duplexed documents such as brochures, set the registration for the tray before printing to ensure
that the front and back of the page are aligned.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT QUALITY and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight SET REGISTRATION and then press the checkmark button
.
5. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT TEST PAGE, and then press the checkmark button
.
6. Follow the instructions on the test page to complete the adjustment.
122 Chapter 8 Use product features
ENWW
Cancel a print job
You can stop a print request by using the control panel or by using the software program. For instructions
about how to stop a print request from a computer on a network, see the online Help for the specific
network software.
NOTE: It can take some time for all printing to clear after you have canceled a print job.
Stop the current print job from the control panel
Press STOP on the control panel.
▲
Stop the current print job from the software program
A dialog box will appear briefly on the screen, giving you the option to cancel the print job.
If several requests have been sent to the device through your software, they might be waiting in a print
queue (for example, in Windows Print Manager). See the software documentation for specific
instructions about canceling a print request from the computer.
If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler (Windows 2000 or XP), delete
the print job there.
Click Start and then click Printers. Double-click the device icon to open the print spooler. Select the
print job that you want to cancel, and then press Delete. If the print job is not cancelled, you might need
to shut down and restart the computer.
124 Chapter 9 Print tasks
ENWW
Use features in the Windows printer driver
Open the printer driver
How do I
Steps to perform
Open the printer driver
On the File menu in the software program, click Print. Select
the printer, and then click Properties or Preferences.
Get help for any printing option
Click the ? symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver,
and then click any item in the printer driver. A pop-up message
displays that provides information about the item. Or, click
Help to open the online Help.
Use printing shortcuts
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
NOTE: In previous HP printer drivers, this feature was called Quick Sets.
How do I
Steps to perform
Use a printing shortcut
Select one of the shortcuts, and then click OK to print the job
with the predefined settings.
Create a custom printing shortcut
a) Select an existing shortcut as a base. b) Select the print
options for the new shortcut. c) Click Save As, type a name for
the shortcut, and click OK.
Set paper and quality options
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Paper/Quality tab.
How do I
Steps to perform
Select a page size
Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.
Select a custom page size
a) Click Custom. The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens.
b) Type a name for the custom size, specify the dimensions,
and click OK.
Select a paper source
Select a tray from the Paper source drop-down list.
Select a paper type
Select a type from the Paper type drop-down list.
Print covers on different paper
Print the first or last page on different paper
a) In the Special pages area, click Covers or Print pages on
different paper, and then click Settings. b) Select an option
to print a blank or preprinted front cover, back cover, or both.
Or, select an option to print the first or last page on different
paper. c) Select options from the Paper source and Paper
type drop-down lists, and then click Add. d) Click OK.
Adjust the resolution of printed images
In the Print Quality area, select an option from the first drop-
down list. See the printer-driver online Help for information
about each of the available options.
Automatically adjust the quality of printed photos
In the Print Quality area, select an option from the HP real life
technologies drop-down list.
ENWW
Use features in the Windows printer driver 125
How do I
Steps to perform
Remove red-eye occurrences from printed photos.
Adjust the gloss level on printed pages.
In the Print Quality area, click Remove red eye.
In the Print Quality area, select an option from the Gloss
Level drop-down list.
Set document effects
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Effects tab.
How do I
Steps to perform
Scale a page to fit on a selected paper size
Click Print document on, and then select a size from the drop-
down list.
Scale a page to be a percent of the actual size
Print a watermark
Click % of actual size, and then type the percent or adjust the
slider bar.
a) Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop-down list.
b) To print the watermark on the first page only, click First page
only. Otherwise, the watermark is printed on each page.
Add or edit watermarks
a) In the Watermarks area, click Edit. The Watermark
Details dialog box opens. b) Specify the settings for the
watermark, and then click OK.
NOTE: The printer driver must be stored on your computer
for this to work.
Set document finishing options
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Finishing tab.
How do I
Steps to perform
Print on both sides (Duplex)
Click Print on both sides. If you will bind the document along
the top edge, click Flip pages up.
Print a booklet
a) Click Print on both sides. b) In the Booklet layout drop-
down list, click Left binding or Right binding. The Pages per
sheet option automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet.
Print multiple pages per sheet
Select page orientation
a) Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per
sheet drop-down list. b) Select the correct options for Print
page borders, Page order, and Orientation.
a) In the Orientation area, click Portrait or Landscape. b) To
print the page image upside down, click Rotate by 180
degrees.
Set product output options
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Output tab.
NOTE: The options that are available on this tab depend on the finishing device that you are using.
126 Chapter 9 Print tasks
ENWW
How do I
Steps to perform
Select staple options
Select an output bin
Select a stapling option from the Staple drop-down list.
Select an output bin from the Bin drop-down list.
Set job storage options
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Job Storage tab.
How do I
Steps to perform
Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies
In the Job Storage Mode area, click Proof and Hold. The
product prints the first copy only. A message appears on the
product control panel that prompts you to print the rest of the
copies.
Temporarily store a private job on the product and print it later a) In the Job Storage Mode area, click Personal Job. b) In
the Make Job Private area, enter a 4-digit personal
identification number (PIN).
Temporarily store a job on the product
In the Job Storage Mode area, click Quick Copy. One copy
of the job is printed immediately, but you can print more copies
from the product control panel.
NOTE: These jobs are deleted if the product is turned off.
Permanently store a job on the product
In the Job Storage Mode area, click Stored Job.
Make a permanently stored job private so that anyone who
tries to print it must provide a PIN
a) In the Job Storage Mode area, click Stored Job. b) In the
Make Job Private area, click PIN to print, and then enter a 4-
digit personal identification number (PIN).
Receive notification when someone prints a stored job
Set the user name for a stored job
In the Job Notification Options area, click Display Job ID
when printing.
In the User Name area, click User name to use the Windows
default user name. To provide a different user name, click
Custom and type the name.
Specify a name for the stored job
a) In the Job Name area, click Automatic to use the default
job name. To specify a job name, click Custom and type the
name. b) Select an option from the If job name exists drop-
down list. Select Use Job Name + (1-99) to add a number to
the end of the existing name, or select Replace Existing
File to overwrite a job that already has that name.
Set color options
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Color tab.
How do I
Steps to perform
Manually adjust color settings
a) In the Color Options area, click Manual, and then click
Settings. b) You can adjust the general settings for Edge
Control, and settings for text, graphics, and photographs. See
the online Help in the driver for information about each option.
ENWW
Use features in the Windows printer driver 127
How do I
Steps to perform
Turn off color printing and use only shades of gray.
Change the way that colors are rendered
In the Color Options area, click Grayscale.
In the Color Themes area, select an option from the drop-
down list. See the online Help in the driver for information about
each option.
Obtain support and product-status information
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Services tab.
How do I
Steps to perform
Obtain support information for the product and order supplies In the Internet Services drop-down list, select a support
online option, and click Go!
Check the status of the product, including the level of supplies Click the Device and Supplies Status icon. The Device
Status page of the HP embedded Web server opens.
Set advanced printing options
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Advanced tab.
How do I
Steps to perform
Select advanced printing options
In any of the sections, click a current setting to activate a drop-
down list so you can change the setting.
Change the number of copies that are printed
Open the Paper/Output section, and then enter the number of
copies to print. If you select 2 or more copies, you can select
the option to collate the pages.
NOTE: If the software program that you are using does not
provide a way to print a particular number of copies, you can
change the number of copies in the driver.
Changing this setting affects the number of copies for all print
jobs. After your job has printed, restore this setting to the
original value.
Print colored text as black rather than as shades of gray
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the
Printer Features section. b) In the Print All Text as Black
drop-down list, select Enabled.
Load letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for every
job, whether printing on one or both sides of the page
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the
Printer Features section. b) In the Alternative Letterhead
Mode drop-down list, select On. c) At the product, load the
paper the same way you would for printing on both sides.
Change the order in which pages are printed
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the
Layout Options section. b) In the Page Order drop-down list,
select Front to Back to print the pages in the same order as
they are in the document, or select Back to Front to print the
pages in the reverse order.
128 Chapter 9 Print tasks
ENWW
Manage color
Setting color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for the most common
printing requirements. However, for some documents, setting the color options manually can enhance
the way the document appears. Examples of these documents include marketing brochures that contain
many images or documents that are printed on a paper type that is not listed in the printer driver.
Use the printer driver to adjust color settings. For more information, see Set color options
Automatic or manual color adjustment
The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge
enhancements that are used for each element in a document.
NOTE: Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing most color documents.
The Manual color adjustment option allows you to adjust the neutral gray color treatment, halftones,
and edge enhancements for text, graphics, and photographs.
Manual color options
You can manually adjust color options for Edge Control, Halftones, and Neutral Grays.
Edge Control
The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has three components:
adaptive halftoning, Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), and trapping. Adaptive halftoning
increases the edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color alignment by slightly
overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The color REt option smoothes the edges.
NOTE: If you notice white gaps between objects, or if you notice areas that have a slight shadow of
cyan, magenta, or yellow at the edge, choose an edge-control setting that increases the trapping level.
Four levels of edge control are available:
Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are
on.
●
Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level. Adaptive halftoning and color
REt settings are on.
●
Light sets trapping at a minimal level. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on.
●
●
Off turns off trapping, adaptive halftoning, and color REt.
Halftone options
Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can select halftone settings
for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail.
The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances
photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when uniform and smooth
area fills are top priority.
●
The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or
colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option when sharp
edges and details are top priority.
●
130 Chapter 10 Use color
ENWW
NOTE: Some software programs convert text or graphics to bitmap images. In these cases, setting
the color options for photographs also affects how text and graphics appear.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors that are used in text,
graphics, and photographs.
Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting:
Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) using only black toner. This guarantees
neutral colors without a color cast.
●
4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors. This method
produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it produces the darkest
black.
●
Print in grayscale
Use grayscale printing to print documents in black and shades of gray. For Windows, select the Print
in Grayscale option. For Macintosh, select the Print Color as Gray option.
Restrict color use
This product includes a RESTRICT COLOR setting. A network administrator can use the setting to
restrict user access to the color printing in order to conserve color toner. If you are unable to print in
color, see your network administrator.
Restrict color printing
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight RESTRICT COLOR, and then press the checkmark button
.
5. Select one of the following options:
DISABLE COLOR. This setting denies color-printing capabilities to all users.
●
●
●
ENABLE COLOR (default). This setting allows color-printing capabilities for all users.
COLOR IF ALLOWED. The setting allows the network administrator to allow color use for
select users and/or applications. Use the embedded Web server to designate which users
and/or applications can print in color.
6. Press the checkmark button
to save.
ENWW
Manage color 131
RGB Color (Color Themes)
You can change RGB Color settings from the printer-driver. For more information on accessing the
printer driver, see Set color options on page 127 for Windows and Set the color options on page 68 for
Macintosh.
Five values are available for the RGB Color setting:
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB
color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium
(W3C).
●
●
Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap
images, such as .GIF or .JPEG files. This setting instructs the product to use the best color matching
for rendering sRGB, bitmap images. This setting has no effect on text or vector-based graphics.
Using glossy paper in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.
Select AdobeRGB for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. For
example, some digital cameras capture images in AdobeRBG, and documents that are produced
with Adobe PhotoShop use the AdobeRGB color space. When printing from a professional software
program that uses AdobeRGB, it is important that you turn off the color management in the software
program and allow the product software to manage the color space.
●
●
Select Custom Profile when you want to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less
colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. You can download custom profiles from www.hp.com/
132 Chapter 10 Use color
ENWW
Match colors
The process of matching product output color to your computer screen is quite complex because printers
and computer monitors use different methods of producing color. Monitors display colors by light pixels
using an RGB (red, green, blue) color process, but printers print colors using a CMYK (cyan, magenta,
yellow, and black) process.
Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor. These factors
include:
Paper
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Printer colorants (inks or toners for example)
Printing process (inkjet, press, or laser technology for example)
Overhead lighting
Personal differences in perception of color
Software programs
Printer drivers
Computer operating system
Monitors and monitor settings
Video cards and drivers
Operating environment (humidity for example)
Keep the above factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors.
For most users, the best method for matching colors on your screen to your product is to print sRGB
colors.
Sample book color matching
The process for matching product output to preprinted sample books and standard color references is
complex. In general, you can obtain a reasonably good match to a sample book if the inks used to create
the sample book are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These are usually referred to as process color
sample books.
Some sample books are created from spot colors. Spot colors are specially created colorants. Many of
these spot colors are outside of the range of the product. Most spot color sample books have companion
process sample books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color.
Most process sample books will state which process standards were used to print the sample book. In
most cases they will be SWOP, EURO, or DIC. To get optimal color matching to the process sample
book, select the corresponding ink emulation from the product menu. If you cannot identify the process
standard, use SWOP ink emulation.
Printing color samples
To use the color samples, select the color sample that is the closest match to the desired color. Use the
sample’s color value in your software program to describe the object you wish to match. Colors may
ENWW
Match colors 133
vary depending on paper type and the software program used. For more details on how to use the color
Use the following procedure to print color samples at the product using the control panel:
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the checkmark button to highlight INFORMATION, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES or PRINT RGB SAMPLES to print the samples.
PANTONE® color matching
PANTONE has multiple color matching systems. PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM® is very popular
and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints. See www.hp.com/go/
cljcp6015_software for details on how to use PANTONE Colors with this product.
NOTE: PANTONE Colors generated might not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current
PANTONE Publications for accurate color.
134 Chapter 10 Use color
ENWW
Advanced color use
HP ImageREt 4800
HP ImageREt 4800 print technology is a system of innovative technologies developed exclusively by
HP to deliver superior print quality. The HP ImageREt system sets itself apart from the industry by
integrating technology advancements and optimizing each element of the print system. Several
categories of HP ImageREt have been developed for a variety of user needs.
The system uses key color-laser technologies, including image enhancements, smart supplies, and
high-resolution imaging, to provide superior images for general office documents and marketing
collateral. Optimized for printing on HP color laser high-gloss papers, HP Image REt 4800 provides
superior results on all supported paper, and under a variety of environmental conditions.
Paper selection
For the best color and image quality, it is important to select the appropriate paper type from the product
menu or from the front panel.
sRGB
Standard red-green-blue (sRGB) is a worldwide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft
as a common color language for monitors, input devices (scanners, digital cameras), and output devices
(products, printers, plotters). It is the default color space used for HP products, Microsoft operating
systems, the Web, and most office software sold today. sRGB is representative of the typical Windows
computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high-definition television.
NOTE: Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room’s lighting can affect the appearance
of colors on your screen.
The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop, CorelDRAW™, Microsoft Office, and many other software
programs use sRGB to communicate color. Most importantly, as the default color space in Microsoft
operating systems, sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between
software programs and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience
greatly improved color matching. sRGB improves your ability to match colors between the product, the
computer monitor, and other input devices (scanner, digital camera) automatically, without the need to
become a color expert.
Print in four colors — CMYK
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK) are the inks used by a printing press. The process is often
called four-color printing. CMYK data files are typically used by and originate from graphic arts (printing
and publishing) environments. The product will accept CMYK colors through the PS printer driver. The
product color-rendering of CMYK is designed to provide rich, saturated colors for text and graphics.
CMYK ink set emulation (HP postscript level 3 emulation)
The product color rendering of CMYK can be made to emulate several standard offset press ink sets.
In some situations, the CMYK color values in an image or document might not be suited to the product.
For example, a document might be optimized for another product. For best results, the CMYK values
ENWW
Advanced color use 135
should be adapted to the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series. Select the appropriate color input profile
from the printer driver.
Default CMYK+. HP CMYK+ technology produces optimal printing results for most printing jobs.
●
●
Specification for Web Offset Publications (SWOP). Common ink standard in the United States
and other countries/regions.
Euroscale. Common ink standard in Europe and other countries/regions.
●
●
●
Dainippon Ink and Chemical (DIC). Common ink standard in Japan and other countries/regions.
Custom profile. Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output,
for example, to emulate another HP color LaserJet product. Color profiles can be downloaded from
TrueCMYK
This mode can be selected on the Advanced tab of the PS print driver when an external third party
digital front end, such as raster image processing (RIP) software, is used to manage the document flow
within an organization. It will not generate acceptable results for most users unless a digital front end is
136 Chapter 10 Use color
ENWW
Information pages
Information pages provide details about the product and its current configuration. Use the following
procedure to print the information pages.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight INFORMATION, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight the required information, and then press the checkmark button
to print.
138 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
HP Easy Printer Care
Open the HP Easy Printer Care software
Use one of the following methods to open the HP Easy Printer Care software:
On the Start menu, select Programs, select Hewlett-Packard, select HP Easy Printer Care, and
then click Start HP Easy Printer Care.
●
●
●
In the Windows system tray (in the lower-right corner of the desktop), double-click the HP Easy
Printer Care icon.
Double-click the desktop icon.
HP Easy Printer Care software sections
HP Easy Printer Care software can provide information about multiple HP products that are on your
network as well as any products that are directly connected to your computer. Some of the items that
are in the following table might not be available for every product.
The Help button (?) in the upper-right corner of each page provides more detailed information about the
options on that page.
Section
Options
Device List tab
Devices list: Shows the products that you can select.
●
When you open the software, this is the
first page that appears.
NOTE: The product information appears either in list form or as icons,
depending on the setting for the View as option.
NOTE: To return to this page from any
tab, click My HP Printers in the left side
of the window.
The information on this tab includes current alerts for the product.
●
●
If you click a product in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care opens the
Overview tab for that product.
Compatible Printers
Provides a list of all the HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software.
Find Other Printers window
Click the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list to open the Find Other
Printers window. The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects
other network printers so that you can add them to the My HP Printers list and then
monitor those products from your computer.
Add more products to the
My HP Printers list
Overview tab
Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information
and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as an empty
print cartridge. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh
●
Contains basic status information for the
device
button
in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status.
Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the
percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridge and the status of the paper
that is loaded in each tray.
●
●
Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed
information about product supplies, ordering information, and recycling
information.
ENWW
HP Easy Printer Care 139
Section
Options
Support tab
Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information
●
and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as an empty
print cartridge. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh
Provides links to support information
button
in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status.
Device Management section: Provides links to information about HP Easy
Printer Care, to advanced product settings, and to product usage reports.
●
●
Troubleshooting and Help: Provides links to tools that you can use to resolve
problems, to online product support information, and to online HP experts.
Settings tab
About: Provides general information about this tab.
●
●
Configure product settings, adjust print-
quality settings, and find information
about specific product features
General: Provides information about the product, such as the model number,
serial number, and the settings for date and time, if they are available.
Information Pages: Provides links to print the information pages that are
available for the product.
●
●
NOTE: This tab is not available for
some products.
Capabilities: Provides information about product features, such as duplexing,
the available memory, and the available printing personalities. Click Change
to adjust the settings.
Print Quality: Provides information about print-quality settings. Click
Change to adjust the settings.
●
●
●
Trays / Paper: Provides information about the trays and how they are
configured. Click Change to adjust the settings.
Restore Defaults: Provides a way to restore the product settings to the factory
defaults. Click Restore to restore the settings to the defaults.
HP Proactive Support
When enabled, HP Proactive Support routinely scans your printing system to identify
potential problems. Click the more info link to configure how frequently the scans
occur. This page also provides information about available updates for product
software, firmware, and HP printer drivers. You can accept or decline each
recommended update.
NOTE: This item is available from the
Overview and Support tabs.
Supplies Ordering button
Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each product. To order
a certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list. You
can sort the list by product, or by the supplies that need to be ordered the
soonest. The list contains supplies information for every product that is in the
My HP Printers list.
●
Click the Supplies Ordering button on
any tab to open the Supplies Ordering
window, which provides access to online
supplies ordering.
Shop Online for Supplies button: Opens the HP SureSupply Web site in a
new browser window. If you have checked the Order check box for any items,
the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site, where
you will receive information on options for purchasing your selected supplies.
●
●
NOTE: This item is available from the
Overview and Support tabs.
Print Shopping List button: Prints the information for the supplies that have
the Order check box selected.
Alert Settings link
Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings window, in which you can configure
alerts for each product.
NOTE: This item is available from the
Overview and Support tabs.
Alerting is on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature.
●
●
Printer Alerts: Select the option to receive alerts for critical errors only, or for
any error.
Job Alerts: For products that support it, you can receive alerts for specific print
●
jobs.
Color Access Control
Use this feature to permit or restrict color printing.
140 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
Section
Options
NOTE: This item is available only for
HP color products that support Color
Access Control.
NOTE: This item is available from the
Overview and Support tabs.
ENWW
HP Easy Printer Care 141
Embedded Web server
Use the embedded Web server to view product status, configure product network settings, and to
manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the product control panel. The following
are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server:
NOTE: When the product is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care to view
the product status instead of the embedded Web server.
View product status information.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones.
View and change tray configurations.
View and change the product control-panel menu configuration.
View and print internal pages.
Receive notification of product and supplies events.
View and change network configuration.
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or Netscape
6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for
HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The embedded Web server works when the product is connected to an IP-
based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based product connections. You do
not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.
When the product is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available.
NOTE: For complete information about using the embedded Web server, see the Embedded Web
Server User Guide, which is on the CD that came with the product.
Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection
1. In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the product IP address or host name in the
address/URL field. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration page. See Information
NOTE: After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the
future.
2. The embedded Web server has the following tabs that contain settings and information about the
product:
Information tab
Settings tab
●
●
●
Networking tab
142 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
Embedded Web server sections
Tab or section
Options
Information tab
Device Status: Shows the product status and shows the life remaining of
●
HP supplies, with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type
and size of print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change
Settings.
Provides product, status, and
configuration information
Configuration Page: Shows the information found on the configuration page.
●
●
Supplies Status: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0 percent indicating
that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new
supplies, click Shop for Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the
window.
Event log: Shows a list of all product events and errors.
●
●
Usage page: Shows a summary of the number of pages the product has printed,
grouped by size and type.
Diagnostics page: Allows you to name the product, show the company name,
assign an asset number to the product, and name the primary contact who manages
the product. An HP-authorized support person might ask for this information.
●
●
●
Device Information: Shows the product network name, address, and model
information. To customize these entries, click Device Information on the Settings
tab.
Control Panel: Shows messages from the control panel, such as Ready or Sleep
mode on.
Print: Allows you to send print-ready jobs to the product.
●
●
Settings tab
Configure Device: Allows you to configure product default settings. This page
contains the traditional menus found on the control-panel display.
Provides the ability to configure the
product from your computer
E-mail Server: Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up e-
mail alerts.
●
●
●
●
Alerts: Network only. Allows you to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various product
and supplies events.
AutoSend: Allows you to configure the product to send automated e-mails regarding
product configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.
Security: Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the
Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the
embedded Web server.
Edit Other Links: Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site. This
link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages.
●
●
Device Information: Allows you to name the product and assign an asset number
to it. Enter the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive
information about the product.
Language: Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded
Web server information.
●
●
Date & Time: Allows time synchronization with a network time server.
ENWW
Embedded Web server 143
Tab or section
Options
Wake Time: Allows you to set or edit a wake time for the product to become ready.
●
●
Restrict Color: Allows you to permit or restrict color printing. You can specify
permissions for individual users or for jobs that are sent from specific software
programs.
NOTE: The Settings tab can be password-protected. If this product is on a network,
always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this tab.
Networking tab
Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the product
when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the product is
directly connected to a computer, or if the product is connected to a network using anything
other than an HP Jetdirect print server.
Provides the ability to change
network settings from your
computer
NOTE: The Networking tab can be password-protected.
Other links
HP Instant Support™: Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions
to product problems.
●
●
Contains links that connect you to
the Internet
Shop for Supplies: Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site, where you will receive
information on options for purchasing original HP supplies, such as print cartridges
and paper.
Product Support: Connects to the support site for the product, from which you can
search for help regarding various topics.
●
●
Show Me How: Connects to information that demonstrates specific tasks for the
product.
NOTE: You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a
dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server,
you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you
close the embedded Web server and reopen it.
144 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
Use HP Web Jetadmin software
HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and
troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies cross-platform
management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP devices. Management is proactive,
allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected. Download this
To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link that is next to
the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you
when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically
connect to the HP Web site.
If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux.
Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
NOTE: Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported.
ENWW
Use HP Web Jetadmin software 145
Security features
This section explains important security features that are available for the product:
●
●
●
Secure the embedded Web server
Assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot change
the product settings.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. On the left side of the window, click Security.
4. Type the password next to New Password, and type it again next to Verify Password.
5. Click Apply. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place.
Secure Disk Erase
To protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the product hard drive, use the Secure Disk Erase
feature in the HP Web Jetadmin software. This feature can securely erase print jobs from the hard
drive.
Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:
Non-Secure Fast Erase. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is removed,
but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent data-storage operations.
This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode.
●
●
Secure Fast Erase. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical
character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is overwritten. Secure
Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the clearing of disk
media.
Secure Sanitizing Erase. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data is
repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This
mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense
5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk media.
●
Data affected
Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are created
during the print process, stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based fonts, disk-based macros (forms),
address books, and HP and third-party applications.
NOTE: Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the
RETRIEVE JOB menu on the product after the appropriate erase mode has been set.
This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) that
is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does not affect data that is
146 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact data that is stored on the
flash-based system boot RAM.
Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it
immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the
product cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed.
Additional Information
For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer or go to
Job storage
To securely print a private job, use the personal job feature. The job can only be printed when the correct
PIN is entered at the control panel. For more information, see Use job storage features on page 113.
Lock the control-panel menus
To prevent someone from changing the product configuration, you can lock the control-panel menus.
This prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server.
The following procedure describes how to restrict access to the control-panel menus by using the
1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
2. Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate
to the DEVICE LISTS folder.
3. Select the product.
4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Configure.
5. Select Security from the Configuration Categories list.
6. Type a Device Password.
7. In the Control Panel Access section, select Maximum Lock. This prevents unauthorized users
from gaining access to configuration settings.
ENWW
Security features 147
Set the real-time clock
Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is
attached to stored print, so you can identify the most recent versions.
Set the real-time clock
Set the date
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the
checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and then press the checkmark
button
.
4. Press the checkmark button
to select DATE/TIME.
5. Press the down arrow to highlight DATE, and then press the checkmark button
.
6. Select the correct month, date of the month, and the year, and then press the
checkmark button
to save.
Set the date format
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the
checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and then press the checkmark
button
.
4. Press the checkmark button
to select DATE/TIME.
5. Press the down arrow to highlight DATE FORMAT, and then press the checkmark
button
.
6. Select the month, date of the month, and year, and then press the checkmark button
to save.
Set the time
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the
checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and then press the checkmark
button
.
4. Press the checkmark
to select DATE/TIME.
5. Press the down arrow to highlight TIME, and then press the checkmark button
.
6. Select the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting, and then press the checkmark
button
to save.
Set the time format
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the
checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and then press the checkmark
button
.
4. Press the checkmark button
to select DATE/TIME.
148 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
5. Press the down arrow to highlight TIME FORMAT, and then press the checkmark
button
.
6. Select the appropriate TIME FORMAT, and then press the checkmark button
to
save.
ENWW
Set the real-time clock 149
Manage supplies
Use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results.
Print-cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes.
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or
remanufactured.
NOTE: Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty and
service agreements.
cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new cartridge.
HP fraud hotline and Web site
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) or go to www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge
is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:
You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.
●
●
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from
HP packaging).
150 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
Replace supplies
When you use genuine HP supplies, the product automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly
depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need
to be replaced. For more information about ordering supplies, see Supplies and accessories
Locate supplies
Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles.
The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item.
Figure 11-1 Supply item locations
1
2
3
4
5
1
Print cartridges
Image drums
Fuser
2
3
4
5
Transfer unit
Transfer roller
Supply replacement guidelines
To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the
product.
Allow sufficient space in the front and on the right side of the product for removing supplies.
The product should be located on a flat, sturdy surface.
●
●
For instructions on installing supplies, see the installation guides provided with each supply item or see
Problem.
CAUTION: Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of genuine HP products in this product. Use of non-
HP products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard extended
warranty or service agreements.
ENWW
Replace supplies 151
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies
The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control panel messages
that prompt when to replace each item. Usage conditions and print patterns may cause results to vary.
Item
Printer message
Page count
Approximate time period
Print cartridges
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
Black: 16,500 pages1
Black: 3 months
Cyan, magenta, or yellow:
21,000 pages 1
Cyan, magenta, or yellow: 4
months
Image drums
Image transfer kit
Image fuser kit
Roller kit
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
REPLACE FUSER KIT
REPLACE ROLLER KIT
150,000 pages2
100,000 pages
150,000 pages
5000 staples
36 months
25 months
36 months
Stapler cartridge
REPLACE STAPLE
CARTRIDGE
Booklet maker staple
cartridges
REPLACE STAPLE
CARTRIDGES 2 AND 3
2,000 booklets
1
2
Cartridge yield figures are based on ISO standard testing.
Approximate life is based on 4,000 pages per month.
Change print cartridges
When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life, the control panel displays a message
recommending that you order a replacement. The product can continue to print using the current print
cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge.
The product uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M),
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).
Replace a print cartridge when the control panel displays a REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
message. The control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced (if a genuine
HP cartridge is currently installed). Replacement instructions are included in the print-cartridge box.
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot
water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE: Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print-cartridge box.
152 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
Replace print cartridges
1. Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and pull down to open.
2. Grasp the handle of the used print cartridge and pull out to remove.
3. Store the used print cartridge in a protective bag. Information about recycling used print cartridges
is on the print-cartridge box.
4. Remove additional print cartridges in the same manner.
5. Remove the new print cartridge from its protective bag.
NOTE: Store the protective bag in a secure place for future use.
ENWW
Replace supplies 153
6. Hold both sides of the cartridge and shake up and down 5-6 times.
7. Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks into place.
8. Insert additional print cartridges in the same manner.
9. Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and lift up to close.
To recycle the used print cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new print cartridge.
Change image drums
When an image drum approaches the end of its useful life, the control panel displays a message
recommending that you order a replacement. The product can continue to print using the current image
drum until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the image drum.
154 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
The product uses four colors and has a different image drums for each color: black (K), magenta (M),
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).
Replace an image drum when the control panel displays REPLACE <COLOR> DRUM message. The
control-panel display also indicates the color that should be replaced (if a genuine HP cartridge is
currently installed). Replacement instructions are included in the image drum box.
NOTE: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot
water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE: Information about recycling used image drums is on the image drum box.
Replace image drums
1. Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and pull down to open.
2. With one hand, lift and slowly pull the used image drum out of the product, while supporting the
image drum with your other hand.
NOTE: If reusing the same image drum, do not touch the green cylinder on the bottom of the
drum because it can damage the drum.
3. Store the used image drum in a protective bag. Information about recycling used image drums is
on the image drum box.
4. Remove additional image drums in the same manner.
ENWW
Replace supplies 155
5. Remove the new image drum from its protective bag.
NOTE: Store protective bag in a secure place for future use.
NOTE: Do not shake the image drum.
NOTE: Do not touch the green cylinder on the bottom of the image drum because it can damage
the drum.
6. Align the image drum with the correct slot and insert the image drum until it clicks into place. The
gray protective cover on the bottom of the drum automatically slides off as the image drum is
inserted. You can discard this cover.
7. Insert additional image drums in the same manner.
8. Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and lift up to close.
To recycle the used image drum, follow the instructions included with the new image drum.
156 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
Install memory
You can install more memory for the product by adding a dual inline memory module (DIMM).
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic
wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal
on the product.
Install DDR memory DIMMs
1. Turn the product off.
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.
ENWW
Replace supplies 157
3. Locate the black formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the product.
4. Gently press the black tabs toward each other.
5. Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the product. Place the formatter board
on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
158 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
6. If you are adding a DIMM to slot 2, locate the hard disk release tab on the bottom of the formatter
board, and then pinch the tab to release the end of the hard disk assembly.
7. Rotate the end of the hard disk assembly upward until you can disengage the hinge tabs at the
other end.
8. Leaving the hard disk assembly plugged in, lay it to the side to allow space to add or replace the
DIMM in slot 2.
9. To replace a DIMM that is currently installed in either slot, spread the latches apart on each side
of the DIMM, lift the DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
XO
XO
XO
XO
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
XO
XO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXOXOXOXO
XOXOXOXOXOXO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XO
XOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
10. Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom
edge of the DIMM.
ENWW
Replace supplies 159
11. Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an
angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the
metal contacts are not visible.
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
XO
XO
XO
XO
X O
X O
X O
X O
X O
XO
XO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXOXOXOXO
XOXOXOXOXOXO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
O
X
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XO
XO
XO
XOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
12. Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM.
XI
IXO
XIO
XIO
O
XI
XIO
XO
XIO
XIXO
XIO
XIO
O
XI
XO
XIO
XIO
XIXO
XIO
X
XO
XO
XO
XO
XO
XO
O
XI
XO
IXO
O
XI
XO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXOXOXOXO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXOXOXOXO
XO
XO
XO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XO
XOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
NOTE: If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure the notch on the bottom of the DIMM
is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure you are using the
correct type of DIMM.
13. If you had moved the hard disk assembly to access slot 2, re engage the hinge taps, and snap the
release tab back into place on the formatter board.
14. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into
the product. Be sure the pressure release tabs snap back into place.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the formatter board, ensure the formatter board is aligned in the
tracks.
160 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
15. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the product on.
16. To enable the new memory, see the following section.
Enable memory for Windows
1. Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 (using the default Start menu view): Click Start, click
Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes.
-or-
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 (using the Classic Start menu
view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.
-or-
Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware and
Sound click Printer.
2. Right-click the driver icon, and then select Properties.
3. Click the Device Settings tab.
4. Expand the area for Installable Options.
5. Next to Printer Memory, select the total amount of memory that is installed.
6. Click OK.
ENWW
Replace supplies 161
Install an HP Jetdirect or EIO print server card or EIO hard disk
This product is equipped with two external I/O (EIO) slots. You can install an additional HP Jetdirect
print server card or a hard disk in the available slots.
1. Turn the product off.
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.
162 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
3. Locate an open EIO slot. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the
EIO slot, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and the cover again. They
can be discarded.
4. Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot.
5. Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card.
ENWW
Replace supplies 163
6. Reconnect the power cable and remaining interface cables, and turn the product on.
7. Print a configuration page. An HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration
and status information should also print.
If it does not print, turn the product off, and then uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure
that it is completely seated in the slot.
8. Perform one of these steps:
Choose the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for
instructions.
●
Reinstall the software, choosing the network installation this time.
●
Replace the staple cartridge
If the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker Accessory or HP Booklet Maker/Finisher Accessory runs out of
staples while it is stapling a print job, the product automatically stops, if set to stop when out. If the
product is set to continue when out, the product will continue to print without stapling.
NOTE: Only replace the staple cartridge unit when the stapler/stacker or booklet maker has run out
of staples. Removing the staple cartridge at other times can cause an error to occur.
NOTE: When the stapler/stacker or booklet maker runs out of staples, the stapler unit will return to its
default position automatically.
Replace the staple cartridge
1. Open the front door of the booklet maker or stapler/stacker.
164 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
2. Push up to on the staple cartridge to remove it from the booklet maker or stapler/stacker.
3. Insert the replacement staple cartridge unit into the stapler unit.
4. Push the staple cartridge unit into the stapler unit until it clicks into position.
5. Close the front door.
ENWW
Replace supplies 165
Replace saddle stitch staple cartridges in the booklet maker
1. Open the front door of the booklet maker.
2. Grasp the blue handle and pull the staple carriage out of the booklet maker.
3. Grasp the small blue handle on the staple cartridge unit and pull it toward you, then swing the staple
cartridge unit into an upright position.
2
1
4. Grasp the edges of each staple cartridge and pull up firmly to remove the staple cartridges from
the staple cartridge unit.
166 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
5. Unpack the new cartridges and remove the plastic packing lock from each one.
6. Hold the new cartridges so that the arrows on the cartridges align with the arrows on the staple
cartridge unit and insert them into the unit.
7. Pull the handle of the staple cartridge unit toward you and rotate it downward to its original position.
Lock it into position by pushing in the handle.
1
2
8. Push the staple carriage back into the booklet maker finisher.
ENWW
Replace supplies 167
9. Close the front door of the booklet maker.
168 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
Clean the product
Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product. This can cause print-quality
problems during printing. Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems.
Clean the paper path and print-cartridge areas every time that you change the print cartridge or
whenever print-quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the device from dust and debris.
Clean the exterior
Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off of the exterior of the device.
Clean spilled toner
If you get any toner on your clothes or hands, wash them in cold water. Hot water will set the toner into
the fabric.
ENWW
Clean the product 169
Upgrade the firmware
The product has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use the information in this section to upgrade
the product firmware.
Determine the current firmware version
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight INFORMATION, and then press the checkmark button
3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION, and then press the checkmark
button
to print.
The firmware datecode is listed on the Configuration page in the section called Printer Information.
The firmware datecode has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X. The first string of numbers is the date,
where YYYY represents the year, MM represents the month, and DD represents the date. For example,
a firmware datecode of that begins with
20061125
represents November 25, 2006.
Download new firmware from the HP Web site
This page provides instructions for downloading the new firmware version.
Transfer the new firmware to the product
NOTE: The product can receive an .RFU file update when it is in a "ready" state.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the
product to re-initialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the
host computer that is sending the update. If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before
the firmware is downloaded (while Receiving Upgrade appears on the control-panel display), the
firmware file must be sent again. If power is lost during the update (while the Performing Upgrade
message appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message Resend
Upgrade appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. In this case, you must send the upgrade
by using the USB port. Finally, any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are completed before
the update is processed.
Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser
NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory
(NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings
and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults.
1. Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address shown on the EIO Jetdirect page.
2. Open a browser window.
3. In the address line of the browser, type
ftp://<ADDRESS>
, where <ADDRESS> is the address of the product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is
192.168.0.90, type
170 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
ftp://192.168.0.90
.
4. Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.
5. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT icon in the browser window.
NOTE: The product turns off and then on automatically to activate the update. When the update
process is complete, a READY message displays on the product control panel.
Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection using Microsoft Windows
NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory
(NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings
and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults.
1. Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page
that prints when you print the configuration page.
NOTE: Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that the product is not in Sleep mode. Also
make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2. Open an MS-DOS command prompt on your computer.
3. Go to the folder where the firmware file is stored.
4. Type: ftp TCP/IP ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp
192.168.0.90.
5. Press Enter on the keyboard.
6. When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
7. When prompted for the password, press Enter.
8. Type binat the command prompt.
9. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
10. Type putand then the file name (for example, if the file name is CP6015.rfu, type CP6015.rfu).
11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer.
NOTE: The product automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.
12. At the command prompt, type: byeto exit the ftp command.
13. At the command prompt, type: exitto return to the Windows interface.
ENWW
Upgrade the firmware 171
Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on your computer. See
Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 145. Complete the following steps to update a single product
through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.
1. Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
3. Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product in the list of devices,
and then click to select it.
If you need to upgrade the firmware for multiple HP Color LaserJet CP6015 series products, select
all of them by pressing the Ctrl key as you click the name of each product.
4. Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update
Printer Firmware from the action list.
5. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box, click Browse in the
Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you
downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
6. Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server. After the
upload is complete, the browser window refreshes.
7. Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
8. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product. The control
panel shows messages that indicate the progress of the upgrade. At the end of the upgrade
process, the control panel shows the READY message.
Use MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware for USB connections
To update the firmware by using a network connection, follow these instructions.
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following
copy /B FILENAME> \\COMPUTERNAME>\SHARENAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is
the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the
product share name. For example:
C:\>copy /b C:\6015FW.RFU \\YOUR_Computer\cljcp6015.
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\6015FW.RFU" \\YOUR_computer\cljcp6015
.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The control panel shows a message that indicates the progress of
the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the READY
message . The message One File Copied appears on the computer screen.
172 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
Upgrade the HP Jetdirect firmware
The HP Jetdirect network interface in the product has firmware that can be upgraded separately from
the product firmware. This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on
update the HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web Jetadmin.
1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
2. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
3. Select the product that you want to update.
4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update.
5. Under Jetdirect firmware version the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware version
are listed. Make a note of these.
7. Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers and find the model number you wrote down.
8. Look at the current firmware version for the model, and see if it is later than the version you wrote
down. If it is, right-click on the firmware link, and follow the instructions on the Web page to
download the new firmware file. The file must be saved into the <drive>:\PROGRAM FILES
\HP WEB JETADMIN\DOC\PLUGINS\HPWJA\FIRMWARE\JETDIRECT folder on the computer
that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software.
9. In HP Web Jetadmin, return to the main product list and select the digital sender again.
10. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update again.
11. On the HP Jetdirect firmware page, the new firmware version is listed under Jetdirect Firmware
Available on HP Web Jetadmin. Click the Update Firmware Now button to update the Jetdirect
firmware.
ENWW
Upgrade the firmware 173
174 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain the product
ENWW
Solving general problems
If the product is not responding as expected, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If
the product does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step
resolves the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist.
Troubleshooting checklist
1. Make sure the product Ready light is on. If no lights are on, complete these steps:
a. Check the power-cable connections.
b. Check that the power switch is on.
c. Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the product power configuration. (See the label
that is on the back of the product for voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip and
its voltage is not within specifications, plug the product directly into the wall. If it is already
plugged into the wall, try a different outlet.
d. Remove any other products plugged into the same circuit.
e. If none of these measures restores power, contact HP Customer Care.
2. Check the cabling.
a. Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make
sure that the connection is secure.
b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.
3. If the product is in the READY state, check to see if any message appear on the control-panel
4. Ensure that the print paper that you are using meets specifications.
5. Print a configuration page (see Information pages on page 138. An HP Jetdirect page also prints.)
a. If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print paper.
6. If the configuration page prints, check the following items.
a. If the page prints correctly, then the product hardware is working. The problem is with the
computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.
b. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware. Contact
HP Customer Care.
7. Select one of the following options:
Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers, or Printers and Faxes. Double click
HP Color LaserJet CP6015.
-or-
176 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Mac OS X: Open Print Center, (or Printer Setup Utility for Mac OS X v. 10.3), and double-click
the line for the HP Color LaserJet CP6015.
8. Verify that you have installed the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 series printer driver. Check the
program to make sure that you are using an HP Color LaserJet CP6015 series printer driver.
9. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works,
then the problem is with the program you are using. If this solution does not work (the document
does not print) complete these steps:
a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed.
b. If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with
a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the
new connection type that you are using.
Restore factory settings
Use the RESETS menu to restore factory settings.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight RESETS MENU, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS, and then press the
checkmark button
to reset the product to the original factory settings.
Factors that affect product performance
Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:
Maximum printer speed, measured in pages per minute (ppm)
The use of special paper (such as transparencies, heavy paper, and custom-size paper)
Printer processing and download time
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
The complexity and size of graphics
The speed of the computer you are using
The USB connection
The printer I/O configuration
The amount of printer memory installed
The network operating system and configuration (if applicable)
Printer personality (HP JetReady, PCL, or PS)
NOTE: Although additional printer memory can resolve memory problems, improve how the printer
handles complex graphics, and improve download times, it will not increase maximum printer speed
(ppm).
ENWW
Solving general problems 177
Automatic neutral calibration
The product can be set up to periodically perform an automatic calibration that adjusts the toner mixture
in order to optimize neutral colors. If you periodically see a page printed that has a band of colors in the
center of the page, the AUTO NEUTRAL CALIBRATION option might be enabled. The default setting
is OFF. You can disable this option to eliminate these extra printed pages.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT QUALITY, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight AUTO CALIBRATE NEUTRALS, and then press the
checkmark button
.
5. Press the down arrow to highlight OFF, and then press the checkmark button
.
178 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Control-panel message types
Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the product.
Message type
Description
Status messages
Status messages reflect the current state of the product. They inform you of normal product operation
and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the product changes. Whenever
the product is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message
READY appears if the product is online.
Warning messages
Error messages
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the
READY or status messages and remain until you press the checkmark button
. Some warning
messages are clearable. If CLEARABLE WARNINGS is set to JOB, the next print job clears these
messages.
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing
a jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable. If AUTO CONTINUE is set on the menus, the product
will continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message appears for 10 seconds.
NOTE: Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the
AUTO CONTINUE setting, and a button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the
Stop button pauses printing with an option to cancel the print job.
Critical-error messages Critical error messages inform you of a product failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by
turning the product off and then on. These messages are not affected by the AUTO CONTINUE
setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.
ENWW
Control-panel message types 179
Control-panel messages
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
10.32.00 Unauthorized Supply
For help press (Help button)
An unauthorized print cartridge has been
installed.
1. If the message persists after loading
authorized cartridges, contact
HP Support at www.hp.com/support/
2. Press the checkmark button
to
continue with this print cartridge.
10.91.00 PRINT CARTRIDGE ERROR
For help press (Help button)
The black print cartridge is defective and
needs to be replaced. Please record
message and contact support. After replacing
the defective cartridge turn the power off then
on to continue.
REPLACE BLACK PRINT CARTRIDGE
To continue turn off then on
10.91.09 PRINT CARTRIDGE ERROR
For help press (Help button)
One of the cyan, magenta, or yellow print
cartridges is defective and needs to be
replaced. Please record the message and
contact support. After replacing the defective
cartridge, turn the power off then on to
continue.
REPLACE COLOR PRINT CARTRIDGES
To continue turn off then on
10.91.XY REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
A toner replenishment malfunction has
occurred.
Replace the print cartridge.
If replacing the print cartridge does not fix the
problem, replace the corresponding image
drum.
10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR
For help press (Help button)
The product cannot read or write to at least
one print cartridge e-label or an e-label is
missing from a print cartridge.
Reinstall the print cartridge, or install a new
print cartridge.
10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR
For help press (Help button)
The product cannot read or write to at least
one image drum.
1. Open the front door.
2. Replace the specified image drum.
3. Close the front door.
10.10.00-10.10.03 = Missing e-label on print
cartridge
10.10.05-10.10.08 = Missing e-label on
image drum
10.00.00-10.00.03 = Defective e-label on
print cartridge
10.00.05-10.00.08 = Defective e-label on
image drum
11.XX Internal clock error
The product real time clock has experienced Whenever the product is turned off and then
an error.
turned on again, set the time and date at the
control panel. See Use the control panel
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
If the error persists, you might need to replace
the formatter.
180 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
13.12.XX JAM IN LEFT ACCESSORY
There is a paper jam in third-party output
accessory.
1. Follow the onscreen instructions to find
and remove the jammed paper.
2. If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
13.JJ.NT FUSER AREA JAM
A jam has occurred in the duplex and feed
area.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before handling it.
1. Open the right door.
2. Turn the blue levers on the fuser to
unlock position.
3. Clear all paper.
4. Turn the blue levers to lock position.
5. Close the right door.
13.JJ.NT FUSER WRAP JAM
A jam has occurred in the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before handling it.
1. Open the right door.
2. Turn the blue levers on the fuser to
unlock position.
3. Clear all paper.
4. Turn the blue levers to lock position.
5. Close the right door.
To prevent jam in future, set the print
optimization mode LIGHT MEDIA to ON. See
13.JJ.NT JAM ABOVE TOP OUTPUT BIN
13.JJ.NT JAM IN LOWER RIGHT DOOR
A jam has occurred in the duplex area.
A jam has occurred in the lower right door.
1. Clear all paper found in the duplex area
above the output bin.
2. Press the checkmark button
1. Open the lower right door.
2. Clear all paper.
.
3. Close the lower right door.
1. Open the right door.
2. Clear all paper.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN RIGHT DOOR
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TOP COVER
A jam has occurred in the duplex and feed
area inside the right door.
3. Close the right door.
1. Open the top cover.
2. Clear all paper.
A jam has occurred in the top cover.
3. Close the top cover.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 181
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 1
Description
Recommended action
A jam has occurred in Tray 1.
1. Clear all paper from Tray 1.
2. Press the checkmark button
1. Open the indicated tray.
2. Clear all paper.
.
.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY <X>
A jam has occurred in the indicated tray.
3. Press the checkmark button
13.JJ.NT TRANSFER AND FUSER JAM
A jam has occurred inside the right door in the CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
transfer or fuser area.
product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before handling it.
1. Open the right door.
2. Open the transfer-access panel and
clear all paper found.
3. Remove the fuser and clear all paper
found.
4. Reinstall fuser and close transfer
access panel.
5. Close the right door.
13.JJ.NT TRANSFER AREA JAM
A jam has occurred inside the right door in the 1. Open the right door.
image transfer area.
2. Open the transfer-access panel.
3. Clear all paper found.
4. Close the transfer-access panel.
5. Close the right door.
Press the checkmark button
transferred data (some data might be lost),
and then simplify the print job.
to print the
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
The product received more data than can fit
in the available memory. You might have tried
to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or
complex graphics.
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in
the specified slot (x). An incorrect
Press the checkmark button
transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)
to print the
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
communications protocol might be in use.
Check the host configuration. If this message
persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP support flyer,
22 EMBEDDED I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW
Too much data was sent to the embedded
HP Jetdirect print server.
Press the checkmark button
transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)
to print the
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
Check the host configuration. If this message
persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP support flyer,
22 USB I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW
The product's USB buffer has overflowed.
Press the checkmark button
to print the
transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
Check the host configuration. If this message
persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP support flyer,
182 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
If the message persists, contact HP Support
40 BAD EIO X TRANSMISSION
40 BAD SERIAL TRANSMISSION
The connection between the product and the Press the checkmark button
to clear the
EIO card in the specified slot has been
broken.
error message and continue printing.
Try to reinstall the EIO card.
Press the checkmark button
A serial data error (parity, framing, or line
to clear the
overrun) occurred as data was being sent by error message. (Data will be lost.)
the computer.
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD TRANSMISSION
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Press the checkmark button
to clear the
error message. (Data will be lost.)
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY <XX>
For help press (Help button)
The product detected a different paper size
than expected.
Load the tray with the size and type of paper
indicated, or use another tray.
LOAD TRAY <XX> [TYPE} [SIZE]
To use another tray press
button)
(Checkmark
41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY <XX>
For help press (Help button)
The product detected a different paper size
than expected.
Following the instructions on the screen, load
the tray with the size and type of paper
indicated, or use another tray.
LOAD TRAY <XX> [TYPE} [SIZE]
To use another tray press the checkmark
button
.
To use another tray press
button)
(Checkmark
41.5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY <XX>
For help press (Help button)
The product detected a different paper type Load the tray with the size and type of paper
than expected.
indicated, or use another tray.
To use another tray press the checkmark
LOAD TRAY <X> [TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press (Help button)
button
.
41.5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY <XX>
For help press (Help button)
The product detected a different paper type Load the tray with the size and type of paper
than expected. indicated, or use another tray if available.
LOAD TRAY <X> [TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another tray press
button)
(Checkmark
41.7 ERROR
The paper was late arriving at the registration Press the Help button to see details.
area and almost caused a paper jam.
To continue, touch OK.
To clear, press
(Checkmark button).
To exit, press .
If the error does not clear, turn the product off
and turn it on.
If this error reappears, try using different
media.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 183
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
troubleshooting information.
48.01 TRANSFER UNIT ERROR
For help press (Help button)
The transfer belt has dislocated during
printing.
Turn product off then on.
If the message persists, contact HP Support
50.X FUSER ERROR
A fuser error has occurred.
Make sure you have the correct fuser. Re-
seat the fuser. Turn the product off, and then
turn the product on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP Support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
51.<XY> ERROR
A printer error has occurred.
Turn power off then on.
For help press (Help button)
51.<XY> ERROR
To continue turn off then on
52.<XY> ERROR
A printer error has occurred.
Turn power off then on.
To continue turn off then on
53.XY.ZZ CHECK RAM DIMM SLOT <X>
A memory DIMM error has occurred. DIMM Reseat the memory DIMM in the specified
slot 1 faces toward the outside of the
formatter board. DIMM slot 2 faces toward the
inside of the formatter board closest to the
hard disk.
slot.
If the problem persists, replace the memory
DIMM.
54.<XX> ERROR
Error requires that the product be turned off Turn the product off, and then turn the
then on.
product on.
To continue turn off then on
If the message persists, contact HP Support
55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR To
continue turn off then on
The print engine is not communicating with
the formatter.
Turn the product off, and then turn the
product on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP Support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
56.X ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the product off, and then turn the
product on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP Support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
57.XX ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the product off, and then turn the
product on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP Support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
184 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message Description
Recommended action
58.XX ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the product off, and then turn the
product on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP Support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
59.XY ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the product off, and then turn the
product on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP Support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
60.X ERROR To continue turn off then on The tray specified by X is not lifting correctly. Follow the instructions on the product control
panel.
66.XY.ZZ OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE
An error occurred in an external paper-
handling accessory.
1. Turn the product power off.
2. Check that the accessory is properly
seated on and connected to the product,
without any gaps between the product
and the accessory. If the accessory
uses cables, disconnect and reconnect
them.
3. Verify that there is no packaging
material in or around the output device.
4. Turn the product power on.
5. If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider.
(See the HP Support flyer, or go to
66.XY.ZZ SERVICE ERROR
The external paper-handling controller has
detected a failure.
1. Turn power off.
For help press (Help button)
66.XY.ZZ INPUT DEVICE ERROR
For help press (Help button)
2. Disconnect cables to external paper
handling devices, then reconnect them.
3. Turn power on.
4. Make sure there are no obstructions
near the paper handling device that
could prevent the output bins from
raising or lowering.
If the message persists, contact HP Support
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL
The product NVRAM is full. Some settings
Press the checkmark button
to clear the
saved in the NVRAM might have been reset message. If the message is not cleared, turn
to the factory defaults. Printing can continue, the product off, and then turn the product on.
but some unexpected functions might occur
To continue press
button).
(Checkmark
If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
if an error occurred in permanent storage.
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL The product NVRAM is failing to write.
Press the checkmark button
to clear the
Printing can continue, but some unexpected message. If the message is not cleared, turn
the product off, and then turn the product on.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 185
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
To continue press
button).
(Checkmark
functions might occur if an error occurred in If this message persists, contact an HP-
permanent storage.
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP Support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS
CHANGED
One or more product settings are invalid and Press the checkmark button
to clear the
have been reset to the factory-default
settings. Printing can continue, but some
unexpected functions might occur if an error
occurred in permanent storage.
message. If the message is not cleared, turn
the product off, and then turn the product on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP Support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
69.X ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the product off, and then turn the
product on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See
the HP Support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
<Bin name> FULL
The specified output bin is full.
Empty bin and continue printing. Output bins
include the standard top bin, and, if you have
an optional paper handling device, the upper
left bin, middle left bin, lower left bin, or lower
booklet bin
Remove all paper from bin
ACTION NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE
The user attempted to set the registration for Configure the tray to a specific size, and then
FOR TRAY X TRAY SIZE CANNOT BE ANY a tray that is set to ANY SIZE or ANY
set the registration for that tray.
SIZE/ANY CUSTOM
CUSTOM. Duplex registration is not available
when the size is set to ANY SIZE or ANY
CUSTOM.
Canceling…
BAD DUPLEXER CONNECTION
The duplexer is not functioning correctly.
The optional tray is not connected.
Turn the product off then on. If this message
persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. See the HP support flyer, or
BAD OPTIONAL TRAY CONNECTION
1. Turn product off
2. Remove and then reinstall optional tray
or trays.
If error persists, contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. See the
HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
Calibrating...
Displays during calibration.
No action is necessary.
CALIBRATION RESET PENDING
For help press (Help button)
PROCESSING…
A calibration reset will occur when all jobs are To initiate the reset sooner, cancel all jobs by
processed.
pressing the STOP button.
CARD SLOT <X> NOT FUNCTIONAL
For help press (Help button)
CARD SLOT DEVICE FAILURE
The compact flash card in slot <X> is not
working correctly.
Remove the card from the slot indicated, and
replace with a new card.
The specified device has failed.
Press the checkmark button
to clear.
To clear press
(Checkmark button)
186 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
CARD SLOT FILE OPERATION FAILED
A PJL file system command attempted to
perform an illogical operation.
Press the checkmark button
to clear.
to clear.
to clear.
To clear press
CARD SLOT FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press (Checkmark button)
CARD SLOT IS WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press (Checkmark button)
(Checkmark button)
A PJL file system command could not store Press the checkmark button
something on the file system because the file
system was full.
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
Press the checkmark button
CHECKING OUTPUT DEVICE
Checking paper path
An error has occurred with the output device. Remove and reinstall the output device.
The product is checking for possible paper
jams.
No action is necessary.
Checking printer
The product is conducting an internal test.
No action is necessary.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT
AVAILABLE.
A print job requested a product language
(personality) that is not available for this
product. The job will not print and will be
cleared from memory.
Print the job by using a printer driver for a
different printer language, or add the
requested language to the product (if
possible). To see a list of available
personalities, print a configuration page. (See
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
CLEANING DISK <X>% COMPLETE
Do not power off
The product is cleaning the hard disk or a
compact flash disk.
Do not turn off. The product will automatically
restart when cleaning is complete. Product
functions are unavailable.
For help press (Help button)
Cleaning...
A cleaning page is being processed.
No action is necessary.
Clearing event log
This message is displayed while the event log No action is necessary.
is cleared. The product will exit the menus
once the event log has been cleared.
Clearing paper path
The product is attempting to eject jammed
paper.
Check progress at the bottom of the display.
CLOSE LOWER RIGHT DOOR
CLOSE RIGHT DOOR
The lower right door is open.
Close the lower right door.
A door on the right side of the product is open. 1. Close the door.
For help press (Help button)
2. If the message persists, contact
HP Support at www.hp.com/support/
CLOSE TOP COVER
The top cover is open.
Close the top cover.
CODE CRC ERROR SEND FULL RFU ON And error has occurred during a firmware
<X> PORT upgrade.
If the message persists, contact HP Support
COLOR RFU FAILED SEND FULL RFU ON And error has occurred during a firmware
If the message persists, contact HP Support
<X> PORT
upgrade.
CONNECT OUTPUT DEVICE
No external output device is installed.
1. Turn power off.
2. Connect output device product cable.
3. Turn power on.
To continue without output device, turn power
off, remove the output accessory bridge, and
then turn power on.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 187
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
If error persists, contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. See the
HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
Cooling Device...
The product is adding additional pauses to
the print cycle in order to cool down.
The product has recently experienced a
period of heavy usage, so it has entered a
cooling cycle in order to maintain a supported
operating temperature. No action is
necessary.
CORRUPT FIRMWARE IN EXTERNAL
ACCESSORY
The product detected corrupt firmware in the An external accessory of the product requires
input or output accessory.
a firmware upgrade. Printing can continue if
other inputs or outputs are available, but jams
may occur if the job uses the corrupt external
accessory. To view the upgrade procedure
and download the most recent firmware, go
For help press (Help button)
DATA RECEIVED
The product is waiting for the command to
print the last page.
Press the checkmark button
last page.
to print the
To print last page press
button)
(Checkmark
DATE/TIME= YYYY/MMMM/DD HH:MM
The current date and time set for the product. Press the checkmark button
to set the
date and time or press the stop button to skip
setup.
To change press
To skip press STOP
Deleting private jobs
Deleting...
(Checkmark button)
The product is deleting a private stored job. No action is necessary.
The product is currently deleting the stored
job.
No action is necessary.
Device shutting down...
EIO <X> disk initializing
EIO <X> disk is spinning up
Device is shutting down.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
The specified EIO disk device is initializing.
EIO disk device in slot <X> is spinning up its No action is necessary.
platter. Jobs that require disk access must
wait.
EIO <X> DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL
For help press (Help button)
The EIO disk in slot <X> is not working
correctly.
1. Turn product off.
2. Remove disk from the slot indicated.
3. Replace with new disk.
4. Turn product on.
EIO DEVICE FAILURE
The specified device has failed.
Press the checkmark button
to clear.
to clear.
to clear.
to clear.
To clear press
(Checkmark button)
EIO FILE OPERATION FAILED
A PJL file system command attempted to
perform an illogical operation.
Press the checkmark button
To clear press
(Checkmark button)
EIO FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
A PJL file system command could not store Press the checkmark button
something on the file system because the file
system was full.
To clear press
(Checkmark button)
EIO IS WRITE PROTECTED
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
Press the checkmark button
To clear press
(Checkmark button)
188 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
EXTERNAL DEVICE INITIALIZING
The external paper handling device is
initializing.
No action is necessary.
FINISHING PROCESS NOT FUNCTIONAL A finishing process has failed.
Press the help button for help.
For help press (Help button)
INCOMPATIBLE FUSER
The incorrect fuser was installed.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before handling it.
1. Open right door.
2. Turn blue levers to unlock position.
3. Remove incompatible fuser.
4. Install correct fuser.
5. Turn blue levers to lock position.
6. Close the right door.
INCOMPATIBLE ROLLER KIT
Initializing permanent storage
Installed roller kit is incompatible.
1. Open right door.
2. Remove incompatible roller kit.
3. Install correct roller kit.
4. Close the right door.
Displayed when the product is turned on to
show that permanent storage is being
initialized.
No action is necessary.
INPUT PAPER PATH OPEN
For help press (Help button)
The paper path between the product and the Close the paper path.
external paper handling input device is open
and must be closed before printing can
continue.
INSTALL <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
For help press (Help button)
INSTALL <COLOR> DRUM
For help press (Help button)
INSTALL FUSER
The print cartridge has been removed or has Replace or reinstall the print cartridge
been installed incorrectly.
correctly to continue printing. See Change
One or more of the <color> drums have been Replace or reinstall the image drum correctly
removed or installed incorrectly.
to continue printing. See Change image
The fuser has been removed or installed
incorrectly.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before handling it.
For help press (Help button)
1. Open right door.
2. Turn blue levers to unlock position.
3. Install or adjust fuser.
4. Turn blue levers to lock position.
5. Close the right door.
INSTALL ROLLER UNIT
The roller unit has been removed or installed 1. Open right door.
incorrectly.
For help press (Help button)
2. Open transfer access panel.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 189
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
3. Install or adjust roller unit.
4. Close the transfer access panel.
5. Close the right door.
INSTALL SUPPLIES
Press the checkmark button
which supplies need replaced.
to identify
Insert the supply item or make sure the
installed supply item is fully seated.
For status press
(Checkmark button)
INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT
The transfer unit has been removed or
installed incorrectly.
1. Open right door.
2. Open transfer access panel. Push locks
upward.
3. Install or transfer unit.
4. Close the transfer access panel.
5. Close the right door.
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY TO LOAD
FONTS/DATA
The product does not have enough memory To continue without this information press the
to load the data (for example, fonts or
macros) from the location specified.
checkmark button
persists, add more memory.
. If the message
For help press (Help button)
USB STORAGE <X>
To continue press
button).
(Checkmark
INTERNAL DISK DEVICE FAILURE
To clear press (Checkmark button)
The specified device has failed.
Press the checkmark button
Press the checkmark button
to clear.
to clear.
INTERNAL DISK FILE OPERATION
FAILED
A PJL file system command attempted to
perform an illogical operation.
To clear press
INTERNAL DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press (Checkmark button)
INTERNAL DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press (Checkmark button)
(Checkmark button)
A PJL file system command could not store Press the checkmark button
something on the file system because the file
system was full.
to clear.
to clear.
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
Press the checkmark button
INTERNAL DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL
The internal disk is not working correctly.
Turn product off and then on. If the message
INTERNAL DISK SPINNING UP
The internal disk is spinning up its platter.
Jobs that require disk access must wait.
No action is necessary.
JOB NOT STAPLED DUE TO MIXED SIZES A job sent to the optional paper handling
device was not stapled because it had mixed
sizes of paper.
Resend the job using only one size of paper.
LOAD TRAY 1 [Type] [Size]
For help press (Help button)
This message appears when Tray 1 is
selected but is not loaded, and no other paper press the checkmark button
trays are available for use.
Load Tray 1 with requested paper and then
to continue.
190 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
LOAD TRAY 1 [Type] [Size]
Tray 1 is loaded and configured for a type and 1. If the correct paper is loaded, press the
size other than the one specified in the job.
checkmark button
.
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
2. Otherwise, remove the incorrect paper
and load Tray 1 with the specified paper.
For help press (Help button)
3. If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
4. Confirm that the paper guides are in the
correct position.
5. To use another tray, remove paper from
Tray 1 and then press the checkmark
button
.
LOAD TRAY 1 [Type] [Size]
This message appears when Tray 1 is
selected but is not loaded, and other paper
trays are available for use.
1. Load the correct paper in the tray.
To use another tray press
button)
(Checkmark
2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
For help press (Help button)
3. Otherwise, press the
checkmark
button to select another tray.
Loading program <XX> Do not power off Programs and fonts can be stored on the
product’s file system and are loaded into
No action necessary. Do not turn the product
off.
RAM when the product is turned on. The
number XX specifies a sequence number
indicating the current program being loaded.
MANUALLY FEED <TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press (Help button)
This message appears when Tray 1 is
selected but is not loaded, and other paper
trays are available for use.
Load tray with requested paper. If paper is
already in tray, press the help button to exit
message and then press the checkmark
button
to print. To use another tray, clear
paper from Tray 1, press the help button to
exit message and then press the checkmark
button
.
MANUALLY FEED <TYPE> <SIZE>
To continue press
This message appears when Tray 1 is
selected but is not loaded, and other paper
trays are available for use.
Load tray with requested paper.
To override the message, press the
checkmark button
to use a type and size
For help press (Help button)
MANUALLY FEED <TYPE> <SIZE>
of paper that is available in another tray.
The specified job requires a manual feed.
Load tray with requested paper. If paper is
already in tray, press the help button to exit
message and then press the checkmark
To use another tray press
button)
(Checkmark
button
to print. To use another tray, clear
paper from Tray 1, press the help button to
exit message and then press the checkmark
For help press (Help button)
button
.
MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK
The product has printed the first side of a
manual duplex job and is waiting for the user
to insert the output stack to print the second
side.
1. Maintaining the same orientation,
remove document from the output bin.
Then press
(Checkmark button) to
print second sides
2. Flip document printed side up.
3. Load document in Tray 1.
4. Press the
(Checkmark button) to
print.
Moving solenoid
The solenoid is moving as part of a
component test.
No action is necessary.
To exit press STOP
ENWW
Control-panel messages 191
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Moving solenoid and motor
To exit press STOP
No stored jobs
The solenoid and a motor are moving as part No action is necessary.
of a component test.
Displayed when the user enters the
RETRIEVE JOB menu and there are no jobs
to retrieve.
No action is necessary.
NON HP SUPPLY IN USE
A non HP supply is in use.
A user authorized the use of non HP supplies
when the HP supply was replaced. Any
product repair required as a result of using
non HP supplies is not covered under
warranty. Certain features may not be
accurate or available.
For help press (Help button)
Non-HP supply installed
A refilled color or a cloned color/mono
Install a genuine HP cartridge, or press the
cartridge has been installed, and the product checkmark button
to override the
previously used all genuine HP supplies. It
can also appear when an unauthorized
cartridge has been installed, and the product
previously used all genuine supplies.
condition.
OPEN AND CLOSE TRAY 2
For help press (Help button)
ORDER <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
The transfer unit has not been detensioned
after shipping.
Open and close Tray 2.
The identified print cartridge is nearing the
end of its useful life.
Order a replacement print cartridge.
Printing will continue until a supply needs to
be replaced.
ORDER <COLOR> CARTRIDGE LESS
THAN XXXX PAGES
The identified cartridge is nearing the end of Order a replacement cartridge. Printing can
its useful life. The product is ready and will
continue for the estimated number of pages
indicated. Estimated pages remaining is
based upon the historical page coverage of
this product.
continue until the cartridge must be replaced
ORDER <COLOR> DRUM
The identified drum is nearing the end of its Order a replacement drum.
useful life.
Printing will continue until a supply needs to
be replaced.
ORDER <COLOR> DRUM LESS THAN
XXXX PAGES
The identified drum is nearing the end of its Order a replacement drum. Printing can
useful life. The product is ready and will
continue for the estimated number of pages
indicated. Estimated pages remaining is
based upon the historical page coverage of
this product.
continue until the drum must be replaced.
ORDER FUSER KIT LESS THAN XXX
PAGES
The fuser is near end of life. The product is
ready and will continue for the estimated
number of pages indicated. Printing will
continue until a supply needs to be replaced.
Order a replacement fuser kit.
Order a replacement roller kit.
For help press
ORDER ROLLER KIT LESS THAN XXX
PAGES
The identified roller kit is nearing the end of
its useful life. The product is ready and will
continue for the estimated number of pages
indicated. Estimated pages remaining is
based upon the historical page coverage of
this product.
192 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
ORDER STAPLE CARTRIDGE
The staple cartridge has reached the low
Order a staple cartridge. Press the
threshold. Printing and stapling will continue checkmark button
until the staples need to be replaced.
to continue printing.
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
ORDER SUPPLIES
More than one supply needs to be replaced Order the necessary supplies.
or is nearing the end of its useful life.
ORDER TRANSFER KIT
The transfer kit is near end of life. Printing can Order a replacement transfer kit.
continue.
ORDER TRANSFER KIT LESS THAN XXX The transfer unit is near end of life. The
Pages remaining for this supply have
PAGES
product is ready and will continue printing for reached the low threshold. Printing will
the estimated number of pages.
continue until a supply needs to be replaced.
For help press (Help button)
OUTPUT ACCESSORY BRIDGE
ATTACHED
The output accessory bridge was attached
while the product was on. Printing cannot
continue.
1. Turn the product off.
2. Attach the output device.
3. Turn the product on.
To continue turn power off then on
OUTPUT ACCESSORY BRIDGE
DISCONNECTED
The output accessory bridge was removed
while the product was on. Printing cannot
continue.
1. Turn power off.
2. Verify output accessory bridge and
For help press (Help button)
output device is connected correctly.
3. Turn power on.
To continue without the output accessory
bridge, turn power off, attach a standard
output tray, and then turn power on.
If the message persists, contact HP Support
OUTPUT ACCESSORY BRIDGE FAILURE The output accessory bridge has failed.
1. Turn power off.
For help press (Help button)
2. Verify output accessory bridge is
connected correctly.
3. Turn power on.
If the message persists, contact HP Support
Password or name is incorrect. Please
enter correct login.
The user name or password was typed
incorrectly.
Retype the user name and password.
Paused
The product is paused, and there are no error Press the Stop key.
messages pending at the display. The I/O
To return to ready press STOP
Performing COLOR BAND TEST
Performing... PAPER PATH TEST
Please wait
continues receiving data until memory is full.
The color-band test is being performed.
No action is necessary.
The product is performing a paper path test. No action is necessary.
The product is in the process of clearing data. No action is necessary.
PRINTING <REPORT>
The product is generating the specified
report. The product will return to the online
Ready state when the page is completed.
No action is necessary.
PRINTING STOPPED
Time has expired on the Print/Stop test.
Press the checkmark button
to continue.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 193
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
PROCESSING DUPLEX JOB
Do not grab paper until job completes
Processing...
Paper temporarily comes into the output bin Do not grab paper as it temporarily comes
while printing a duplex job. Do not attempt to into the output bin. The message will
remove the pages until the job is complete.
disappear when the job is finished.
The product is currently processing a job but No action is necessary.
is not yet picking pages. When paper motion
begins, this message will be replaced by a
message that indicates which tray the job is
being printed from.
Processing... from tray <X>
Processing...copy <X> of <Y>
The product is actively processing a job from No action is necessary.
the designated tray.
The product is currently processing or
printing collated copies. The message
indicates that copy X of Y total copies is
currently being processed.
No action is necessary.
RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE
The specified device has failed.
Press the checkmark button
to clear.
To clear press
RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED
To clear press (Checkmark button)
RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
(Checkmark button)
A PJL file system command attempted to
perform an illogical operation.
Press the checkmark button to clear.
A PJL file system command could not store Press the checkmark button
something on the file system because the file
system was full.
to clear.
to clear.
To clear press
(Checkmark button)
RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
Press the checkmark button
To clear press
READY
(Checkmark button)
The product is online and ready for data. No No action is necessary.
status or device attendance messages are
pending at the display.
Ready <IP ADDRESS>
Ready Diagnostics mode
To exit press STOP
The product is online and ready.
No action is necessary.
The product is in Diagnostics mode.
To stop Diagnostic mode, press the Stop
button.
Receiving upgrade
A firmware upgrade is in progress.
Do not turn the product off until the product
returns to READY.
REMOVE ALL CARTRIDGES AND DRUMS Remove image drums during component
1. Open front door.
test.
2. Remove image drums and cartridges.
3. Close the front door.
REMOVE ALL IMAGE DRUMS
TO EXIT PRESS STOP
Remove image drums during component
test.
1. Open front door.
2. Remove image drums.
3. Close the front door.
Remove or install cartridge/drum pairs
This message is displayed during the Disable Remove or install cartridge and drum of the
Cartridge Check when the print cartridge and same color together.
194 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
image drum of the same color are not
removed.
To exit press the Stop button.
REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
The identified print cartridge has reached the Replace the specified color cartridge.
REPLACE <COLOR> DRUM
For help press (Help button)
The specified color drum has reached the end Replace image drum.
of life.
1. Open the front door.
2. Replace the specified image drum.
3. Close the front door.
REPLACE <COLOR> DRUM
The REPLACE SUPPLIES menu is set to
STOP AT LOW. The specified image drum
has passed the low threshold.
Replace image drum or press the checkmark
button
to continue until the image drum is
To continue press
button).
(Checkmark
at the end of life.
1. Open the front door.
2. Replace the specified image drum.
3. Close the front door.
REPLACE FUSER KIT
The fuser is nearing the end of its useful life. CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
Printing can continue.
product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before handling it.
1. Open the right door.
2. Turn blue levers to unlock position.
3. Install new fuser.
4. Remove the old fuser unit from the
product.
5. Turn blue levers to lock position.
6. Close the right door.
REPLACE FUSER KIT
For help press (Help button)
The REPLACE SUPPLIES menu is set to
STOP AT LOW. The fuser kit has reached the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
low threshold.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
before handling it.
To continue press
button).
(Checkmark
Press the checkmark button
printing until the fuser reached the end of life
or replaced fuser.
to continue
Replaced fuser
1. Open the right door.
2. Turn blue levers to unlock position.
3. Install new fuser.
4. Turn blue levers to lock position.
5. Close the right door.
REPLACE ROLLER KIT
Pages remaining for roller kit has reached To continue printing without replacing the
the low threshold. roller kit, press the checkmark button
.
For help press (Help button)
ENWW
Control-panel messages 195
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Replace roller kit.
1. Open the right door.
2. Open the transfer access panel.
3. Replace roller kit.
4. Close the transfer access panel.
5. Close the right door.
REPLACE ROLLER KIT
The REPLACE SUPPLIES menu is set to
To continue printing without replacing the
STOP AT LOW. The roller kit is at end of life. roller kit, press the checkmark button
.
For help press (Help button)
Replace roller kit.
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
1. Open the right door.
2. Open the transfer access panel.
3. Replace roller kit.
4. Close the transfer access panel.
5. Close the right door.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
For status press
Two or more supplies are out and need to be Press the checkmark button
to see which
replaced.
supplies need to be replaced.
(Checkmark button).
REPLACE SUPPLIES
Pages remaining for at least two supplies
Press the checkmark button
to continue
have reached the low threshold. The product until the supply reaches the end of life.
was set to stop printing when a supply needs
to be ordered.
To continue press
button).
(Checkmark
REPLACE SUPPLIES - OVERRIDE IN USE The product is set to continue printing even
Press the down arrow to see step by step
information.
though a supply has reached end of life.
CAUTION: Using the Override mode can
result in unsatisfactory print quality. HP
recommends replacing the supply when the
REPLACE SUPPLIES - OVERRIDE IN USE
message appears. The HP Supplies
Premium Protection Warranty coverage ends
when a supply is used in Override mode.
REPLACE SUPPLIES - Using black only
A color supply (or supplies) has reached the No user input is required for printing to
out condition and the COLOR SUPPLY
OUT menu item is set to AUTOCONTINUE
BLACK .
continue. Printing continues in black. For
color printing, replace the needed color print
cartridge or drum.
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
The transfer kit has reached the end of life
Replace transfer kit.
For help press (Help button)
1. Open the right door.
2. Open the transfer access panel.
3. Push locks upward.
4. Install transfer unit.
5. Push locks downward.
196 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
6. Close the transfer access panel.
7. Close the right door.
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
The REPLACE SUPPLIES menu is set to
Press the
to continue printing until the
STOP AT LOW. The transfer kit has passed transfer unit reaches the end of life or replace
For help press (Help button)
the low threshold.
transfer kit.
To continue press
button)
(Checkmark
Replace transfer kit.
1. Open the right door.
2. Open the transfer access panel.
3. Push locks upward.
4. Install transfer unit.
5. Push locks downward.
6. Close the transfer access panel.
7. Close the right door.
Request accepted please wait
The product has accepted a request to print No action is necessary.
an internal page, but the current job must
finish printing before the internal page will
print.
RESEND EXTERNAL ACCESSORY
FIRMWARE
The product detected corrupt firmware in an Printing can continue from another source or
input or output accessory.
to another destination, if available. If product
attempts to use a corrupt accessory, there is
a high probability it will jam.
Resend upgrade
Restoring
The firmware upgrade was not completed
successfully.
Attempt upgrade again.
The product is restoring settings. This
message is displayed during the execution of
a restore action, such as RESTORE COLOR
VALUES.
No action is necessary.
Restoring factory settings
Restoring... [ACCESSORY #]
The product is restoring factory settings.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
The product is restoring external accessory
settings in response to a user request.
RFU LOAD ERROR SEND FULL RFU ON
<X> PORT
An error has occurred during a firmware
upgrade.
If the message persists, contact HP Support
ROM DISK DEVICE FAILURE
The specified device has failed.
Press the checkmark button
to clear.
to clear.
to clear.
to clear.
To clear press
ROM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED
To clear press (Checkmark button)
ROM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
(Checkmark button)
A PJL file system command attempted to
perform an illogical operation.
Press the checkmark button
A PJL file system command could not store Press the checkmark button
something on the file system because the file
system was full.
To clear press
(Checkmark button)
ROM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
Press the checkmark button
To clear press
(Checkmark button)
ENWW
Control-panel messages 197
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Rotating <color> Motor
To exit press STOP
Description
Recommended action
A component test is in progress; the
component selected is the <color> cartridge
motor.
Press STOP when ready to stop this test.
Rotating Motor - To exit press STOP
The product is executing a component test
and the component selected is a motor.
Press STOP when ready to stop this test.
SANITIZING DISK <X>% COMPLETE Do
not power off
The hard disk is being cleaned.
Contact the network administrator.
CLEANING DISK <X>% COMPLETE
For help press (Help button)
Size mismatch in tray XX
The paper in the listed tray does not match
the size specified for that tray.
1. Load the correct paper.
2. Verify the paper is positioned correctly.
3. If the message persists, contact
HP Support at www.hp.com/support/
Sleep mode on
The product is in sleep mode. A button press, No action is necessary.
receipt of printable data, or an error condition
will clear this message.
TRAY <XX> [TYPE] [SIZE]
This message states the current type and
size configuration of the tray.
To change size or type press the checkmark
button
To accept settings press the back
To change size or type press
(Checkmark button) To accept settings
arrow
.
press
(Back arrow)
TRAY <XX> EMPTY [TYPE][SIZE]
The specified tray is empty and the current
job does not need this tray to print.
Refill the tray at a convenient time.
Close the tray.
TRAY <XX> OPEN
The specified tray is open or not closed
completely.
For help press (Help button)
Type Mismatch In Tray <XX>
The specified tray contains a paper type that The specified tray will not be used until this
does not match the configured type.
condition is addressed. Printing can continue
from other trays.
1. Load the correct paper in the specified
tray.
2. Verify the type configuration.
Unable to store job
A job cannot be stored because of a memory Install additional memory in the product.
or configuration problem.
Unauthorized supply in use
The product is using a non-HP supply.
If you believe you purchased a genuine
HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit. Any product repair required
as a result of using non-HP or unauthorized
supplies is not covered under warranty. HP
cannot ensure the accuracy or the availability
of certain features.
USB ACCESSORY ERROR
This message appears when a connected
USB accessory draws too much power.
When this happens, the ACC port is disabled
and printing stops.
Printing can continue. The USB device
should be removed.
For help press (Help button)
198 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
USB STORAGE <X> NOT FUNCTIONAL
For help press (Help button)
A parameter in the USB storage is not
working correctly.
1. Turn product off.
2. Disconnect the USB storage accessory,
and replace with a new USB storage
accessory.
USB STORAGE <X> REMOVED
For help press (Help button)
A USB storage accessory has been
disconnected.
1. Turn product off.
2. Reconnect the USB storage accessory.
3. Turn product on.
USB STORAGE DEVICE FAILURE
The specified device has failed.
Press the checkmark button
to clear.
To clear press
USB STORAGE FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press (Checkmark button)
USB STORAGE IS WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press (Checkmark button)
(Checkmark button)
A PJL file system command could not store Press the help button to clear.
something on the file system because the file
system was full.
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
Press the checkmark button
to clear.
to clear.
USB STORAGE] FILE OPERATION
FAILED
A PJL file system command attempted to
perform an illogical operation.
Press the checkmark button
To clear press
(Checkmark button)
Wait for printer to reinitialize
This message can appear for a variety of
reasons: The RAM DISK settings changed
before the product has rebooted. The product
is auto power cycling after changing external
device modes. The user has exited
No action is necessary.
Diagnostics. A new formatter has been
installed with an old engine or a new engine
has been installed with an old formatter.
WAITING FOR TRAY <XX> TO LIFT
WARMING UP
The specified tray is lifting paper for feeding. No action is necessary.
Product is coming out of powersave mode. No action is necessary.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 199
Jams
Common causes of jams
The product is jammed.
Cause
Solution
The paper does not meet specifications.
Use only paper that meets HP specifications. See Supported
A component is installed incorrectly.
Verify that the transfer belt and transfer roller are correctly
installed.
You are using paper that has already passed through a product Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied.
or copier.
An input tray is loaded incorrectly.
Remove any excess paper from the input tray. Make sure that
the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray.
The paper is skewed.
The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them
so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it.
The paper is binding or sticking together.
Remove the paper, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload
the paper into the input tray.
When printing on lightweight paper or on jobs with heavy toner Set the LIGHT MEDIA optimize mode on the Print Quality
coverage, paper is wrapping on the fuser causing Fuser Delay menu to ON.
Jam or Fuser Wrap Jam messages.
The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin.
Reset the product. Wait until the page completely settles in the
output bin before removing it.
During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the Reset the product and print the document again. Wait until the
second side of the document was printed.
page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
The paper is in poor condition.
Replace the paper.
If the paper is heavier than 220 g/m2 (58 lb), it might not be
picked from the tray.
The internal tray rollers are not picking up the paper.
The rollers are worn. Replace the rollers.
Replace the paper.
The paper has rough or jagged edges.
The paper is perforated or embossed.
Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily. Feed
single sheets from Tray 1.
Device supply items have reached the end of their useful life. Check the product control panel for messages prompting you
to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the
remaining life of the supplies. See Information pages
Paper was not stored correctly.
Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the
original packaging in a controlled environment.
Not all product packing material was removed.
Verify that the packing tape, cardboard, and plastic shipping
locks have been removed from the product.
If the product still continues to jam, contact HP Customer Support or your authorized HP service
provider.
200 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Jam locations
Use this illustration to identify locations of jams. In addition, instructions appear on the control panel to
direct you to the location of jammed paper and how to clear it.
NOTE: Internal areas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams have green handles
or green labels.
Figure 12-1 Jam locations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AREA 1: Output-bin area
AREA 2: Fuser area
AREA 3: Transfer area
AREA 4: Duplexing area (for the HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn, x, and xh models only)
AREA 5: Tray 2 pickup area
AREA 6: Tray 1 area
AREA 7: Optional Trays 3, 4, and 5
AREA 8: Optional finishing device
Clear jams
When a jam occurs, a message appears on the control-panel display that describes the location of the
jam. The following table lists the messages that can appear and provides links to the procedures for
clearing the jam.
WARNING! To avoid electrical shock, remove any necklaces, bracelets, or other metal items before
reaching into the inside of the product.
Type of jam
AREA 1:
Procedure
ENWW
Jams 201
Type of jam
Procedure
13.XX.YY JAM ABOVE TOP OUTPUT BIN
13.XX.YY JAM IN TOP COVER
AREA 2:
13.XX.YY FUSER AREA JAM
13.XX.YY FUSER WRAP JAM
13.XX.YY TRANSFER AND FUSER JAM
AREA 4:
the HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn, x, and xh models only)
13.XX.YY JAM IN RIGHT DOOR
AREA 5:
13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY 2
13.XX.YY TRANSFER AREA JAM
AREA 6:
13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY 1
AREA 7:
13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY 3
13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY 4
13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY 5
13.XX.YY JAM IN LOWER RIGHT DOOR
13.XX.YY JAM IN INPUT ACCESSORY
AREA 8:
13.XX.YY JAM IN LEFT ACCESSORY
13.XX.YY JAM INSIDE TOP DOOR
AREA 1: Clear jams in the output bin
1. If jammed paper is visible in the output bin, gently pull the paper to remove it.
202 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
2. Open the right door.
3. If paper has jammed as it enters the output bin, gently pull the paper to remove it.
4. Close the right door.
ENWW
Jams 203
AREA 2 and AREA 3: Clear jams in the fuser area and the transfer area
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling
it.
1. Open the right door.
2. Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.
1
2
3. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser, gently pull downward to remove it.
204 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
4. Close the transfer-access panel.
5. Open the fuser jam access door above the fuser and remove any paper that is visible. Then close
the fuser jam access door.
2
1
6. Paper could also be jammed inside the fuser where it would not be visible. Remove the fuser to
check for jammed paper inside.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.
a. Pull the two blue fuser handles forward.
ENWW
Jams 205
b. Rotate the fuser-release levers down to open them.
c. Grasp the fuser handles and pull straight out to remove the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser weighs 5 kg (11 lbs). Be careful not to drop it.
d. Open the two fuser jam access doors by pushing and rotating the rear door backward, and
pulling and rotating the front door forward. If paper is jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it
straight up to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper fragments.
CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be
hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers until they have cooled.
3
1
2
206 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
e. Close both fuser jam-access doors and align the fuser with the arrows on the product. Push
the fuser completely into the printer.
f.
Rotate the fuser-release levers up to lock the fuser into place.
g. Push the fuser handles back to close them.
ENWW
Jams 207
7. Close the right door.
AREA 4: Clear jams in the duplex area
NOTE: This procedure is for the HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn, de, x, and xh models only.
1. If jammed paper is visible in the duplex output area, gently pull it to remove it.
2. If no jammed paper is visible in the duplex output area, open the duplex switchback tray. Gently
pull the jammed paper to remove it.
1
2
208 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
3. Check for jammed paper inside the product. Open the right door.
4. If paper is jammed below the duplexing unit, gently pull the paper downward to remove it.
5. If paper is jammed inside the right door, gently pull the paper to remove it.
ENWW
Jams 209
6. Lift the paper-feed cover on the inside of the right door. If jammed paper is present, gently pull the
paper straight out to remove it.
1
2
7. Lift the green handle on the transfer-assembly and open the panel.
1
2
8. Gently pull the paper out of the paper path.
210 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
2. Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.
1
2
3. Gently pull the paper out of the paper path.
4. Close the transfer-access panel.
212 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
5. Open Tray 2 and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly.
6. Pull the tray completely out of the product by pulling and lifting it up slightly.
7. Remove any paper from the feeder rollers inside the product.
8. Reinsert Tray 2 by aligning the side rollers and pushing it back into the product.
ENWW
Jams 213
1. Open the right door.
NOTE: When clearing jams of long paper (11 x 17, 12 x 18, A3, and banners), it may be necessary
to cut or tear the jammed paper before opening the right door.
2. If paper is visible inside the right door, gently pull the paper downward to remove it.
ENWW
Jams 215
3. If paper has entered the internal paper path, lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and
open the panel.
1
2
4. Gently pull the paper out of the paper path.
5. Close the transfer-access panel.
216 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
6. Close the right door.
Clear jams when printing banners
If a paper jam occurs while printing with banner paper, gently pull the paper forward through the output
bin or back through Tray 1 to remove the paper from the paper path. After removing the paper, open
and close the right door to clear the jam message from the control panel. If you cannot remove the paper,
carry out the following steps:
1. Open the right door.
NOTE: If you are printing to very heavy banner paper, and the paper is still feeding in through
Tray 1, you may need to cut the paper at the base of Tray 1 in order to open the right door and pull
the paper free of the Tray 1 rollers.
ENWW
Jams 217
2. Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.
1
2
3. Gently pull the paper out of the paper path
4. Close the transfer-access panel.
218 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
3. Close the right door.
4. Open the lower right door.
5. Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.
220 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
6. Open the tray that is indicated in the control-panel message, and make sure that the paper is
stacked correctly.
7. Close the tray.
8. Close the lower right door.
ENWW
Jams 221
AREA 8: Clear jams in the optional finishing devices
Clear jams in the output-accessory bridge
1. Lift the latch on the top cover of the output-accessory bridge and open the top cover.
2. Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.
3. Close the top cover of the output-accessory bridge.
Clear jams in the sorter area
1. Lift the latch on the top cover of the finishing device, and open the top cover.
NOTE: Opening the top cover releases pressure on the output-bin rollers.
222 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
2. Remove jammed paper from the output bin or from the inside of the finishing device.
2
3
1
3. Close the top cover of the finishing device.
ENWW
Jams 223
4. Lift the swing guide panel in the output bin. If you can see any jammed paper, gently pull it out.
Clear jams in the booklet maker
1. If the paper is visible in the booklet output bin, gently pull the paper to remove it.
2. Open the front door of the booklet maker.
3. Push the upper delivery guide to the right, and remove any jammed paper.
1
2
224 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
4. Push the lower delivery guide to the right, and remove any jammed paper.
2
1
5. The positioning knob is the smaller, green dial on the right. Turn the positioning knob
counterclockwise.
6. The jam-release knob is the larger, green dial on the left. Push in the jam-release knob, and then
turn it clockwise to move any jammed paper into the output bin.
7. Close the front door of the booklet maker.
ENWW
Jams 225
Clear staple jams
Clear staple jams in the main stapler
The HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and the HP Booklet maker/Finisher Accessory each have a main stapler,
which is located near the top of the finishing device.
1. Open the front door of the finishing device.
2. To remove the staple cartridge, pull up on the green handle and pull out the staple cartridge.
3. Lift up on the small lever at the back of the staple cartridge.
4. Remove the damaged staples that protrude from the staple cartridge. Remove the entire sheet of
staples that the damaged staples were attached to.
226 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
5. Close the lever at the back of the staple cartridge. Be sure that it snaps into place.
6. Reinsert the staple cartridge into the finishing device, and push down on the green handle until it
snaps into place.
7. Close the front cover of the finishing device.
Clear staple jams in the booklet maker
The booklet maker has an additional saddle stitch stapler that is below the main stapler. The saddle
stitch stapler has two staple cartridges.
1. Open the front door of the booklet maker.
ENWW
Jams 227
2. Push the upper delivery guide to the right, and remove any jammed paper.
1
2
3. Grasp the blue handle for the stapler carriage and pull it straight out.
4. Grasp the handle of the blue staple cartridge unit and pull it toward you, then swing the staple
cartridge unit into an upright position.
2
1
228 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
5. Check each staple cartridge for jammed staples.
a. On each staple cartridge, press down on the green plastic tabs while lifting the jam clearance
plate.
CAUTION: Do not place your fingers or hands underneath the staple cartridge during this
procedure.
1
2
3
b. Remove any jammed staples. Remove any damaged staples and the entire sheet of staples
that the damaged staples were attached to.
c. Press down on the jam clearance plate to close it.
CAUTION: Do not place your fingers or hands underneath the staple cartridge during this
procedure.
6. Pull the staple cartridge unit forward, and swing it downward to the original position. Push in on the
handle to lock it into position.
1
2
ENWW
Jams 229
7. Push the staple carriage back into the booklet maker.
8. Close the front door of the booklet maker.
Jam recovery
This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. The following options are
available:
AUTO — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available.
●
●
OFF — The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to
store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.
NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on
both sides, some pages can be lost.
ON — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last
few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer.
●
Set the jam recovery feature
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and press the checkmark button
3. Press the down arrow to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and press the checkmark button
4. Press the down arrow to highlight JAM RECOVERY, and press the checkmark button
5. Press the down arrow or up arrow / to highlight the appropriate setting, and press the checkmark
.
.
.
button
.
6. Press Menu to return to the READY state.
230 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Paper-handling problems
Use only paper that meets the specifications outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide.
Product feeds multiple sheets
Product feeds multiple sheets
Cause
Solution
The input tray is overfilled. Open the tray and verify that the
paper stack is below the maximum stack height mark.
Remove excess paper from the input tray.
Print paper is sticking together.
Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over, and
then reload it into the tray.
NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can cause static electricity,
which can cause paper to stick together.
Paper does not meet the specifications for this product.
Trays are not properly adjusted.
Use only paper that meets HP paper specifications for this
product.
Make sure that the paper guides match the size of paper being
used.
Product feeds incorrect page size
Product feeds incorrect page size
Cause
Solution
The correct size paper is not loaded in the input tray.
Load the correct size paper in the input tray.
The correct size paper is not selected in the software program Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer
or printer driver.
driver are correct, because the software program settings
override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the
printer driver settings override the control panel settings. For
more information, see Change printer-driver settings for
The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the product From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the
control panel.
tray.
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the paper size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.
Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper.
Product pulls from incorrect tray
Product pulls from incorrect tray
Cause
Solution
You are using a driver for a different product.
The specified tray is empty.
Use a driver for this product.
Load paper in the specified tray.
ENWW
Paper-handling problems 231
Product pulls from incorrect tray
Cause
Solution
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the paper size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Paper does not feed automatically
Paper does not feed automatically
Cause
Solution
Manual feed is selected in the software program.
Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the
checkmark button
.
The correct size paper is not loaded.
The input tray is empty.
Load the correct size paper.
Load paper into the input tray.
Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path.
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the paper size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.
Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the
paper.
The manual-feed prompt is set to ALWAYS. The product
Open the tray, reload the media, and then close the tray.
always prompts for manual feed, even if the tray is loaded.
Or, change the manual-feed prompt setting to UNLESS
LOADED, so that the product prompts for manual feed only
when the tray is empty.
The USE REQUESTED TRAY setting on the product is set to Load the requested tray.
EXCLUSIVELY, and the requested tray is empty. The product
Or, change the setting from EXCLUSIVELY to FIRST on the
will not use another tray.
CONFIGURE DEVICE menu. The product can use other trays
if no media is loaded in the specified tray.
Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5
Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5
Cause
Solution
The correct size paper is not loaded.
The input tray is empty.
Load the correct size paper.
Load paper in the input tray.
The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the product control panel, select the correct paper type
product control panel. for the input tray.
Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path.
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.
None of the optional trays appear as input tray options.
The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that
232 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5
Cause
Solution
the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional
trays.
An optional tray is incorrectly installed.
Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the
product.
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the paper size for which the tray is configured.
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed
Cause
Solution
The correct paper type is not specified in the software or printer Verify that the correct paper type is selected in the software or
driver.
printer driver.
The input tray is overfilled.
Remove excess paper from the input tray. Do not load more
than 200 sheets of glossy paper or glossy film, or more than
100 transparencies in Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5. Do not exceed the
maximum stack height marks for Tray 1.
Paper in another input tray is the same size as the
Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or
transparencies, and the product is defaulting to the other tray. glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer
driver. Use the product control panel to configure the tray to
the paper type loaded.
The tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is not Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or
configured correctly for type.
glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer
driver. Use the product control panel to configure the tray to
the paper type loaded.
Transparencies or glossy paper might not meet supported
paper specifications.
Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this
product.
High-humidity environments may cause glossy paper not to
feed, or to feed too many sheets.
Print glossy paper from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 for best results.
Avoid printing glossy paper in high humidity conditions. When
printing glossy paper, removing the paper from the wrapper
and letting it rest for a few hours can improve feeding into the
product. However, letting paper rest in humid environments
may also cause blisters.
CAUTION: HP Color Laser Presentation Paper, Glossy (Q2546A, Q2547A) is not supported with this
product. Using this type of paper can cause a fuser jam that might require the replacement of the fuser.
Two recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper, Soft Gloss (Q6541A) and
HP Color LaserJet Brochure Paper, Glossy (Q6611A, Q6610A). For a list of supported paper types, see
ENWW
Paper-handling problems 233
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product
Cause
Solution
Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray. Only Tray 1 can Load envelopes into Tray 1.
feed envelopes.
Envelopes are curled or damaged.
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled
environment.
Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too
high.
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled
environment.
Envelope orientation is incorrect.
Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly.
Refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.
Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes.
This product does not support the envelopes being used.
Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes.
Output is curled or wrinkled
Output is curled or wrinkled
Cause
Solution
Paper does not meet the specifications for this product.
Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this
product.
Paper is damaged or in poor condition.
Product speed needs to be reduced.
Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in
good condition.
Set the PAPER CURL option in the Print Quality menu to
REDUCED to decrease full speed to 10 ppm (instead of 40
ppm) and 3/4 speed to 7.5 ppm (instead of 30 ppm).
Product is operating in an excessively humid environment.
You are printing large, solid-filled areas.
Verify that the printing environment is within humidity
specifications.
Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a
different pattern.
Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh,
moisture.
unopened package.
Paper has poorly cut edges.
Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and
then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem
persists, replace the paper.
The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or
selected in the software.
Configure the software for the paper (see the software
documentation). Configure the tray for the paper, see Load
The paper has previously been used for a print job.
Do not re-use paper.
234 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly
Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly
Cause
Solution
You are trying to duplex on unsupported paper.
The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing.
Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing.
Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.
The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or
letterhead.
Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the
letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page toward
the back of the product. For Tray 2, 3, 4 and 5, load the paper
printed side up with the top of the page toward the back of the
product.
The product model does not support automatic 2-sided
printing.
The HP Color LaserJet CP6015n does not support automatic
2-sided printing.
The product configuration is not set for duplexing.
In Windows, run the automatic configuration feature:
1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click
Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (for
Windows XP).
2. Right-click the HP product icon, and then click
Properties or Printing Preferences.
3. Click the Device Settings tab.
4. Under Installable Options, click Update Now in the
Automatic Configuration list.
ENWW
Paper-handling problems 235
Understand lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly.
1
2
1
2
Heartbeat LED
HP Jetdirect LEDs
HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED
is off, a link has failed.
For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure
the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight I/O, and then press checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU, and then press the
checkmark button
5. Press the down arrow to highlight LINK SPEED, and then press the checkmark button
6. Select the appropriate link speed, and then press the checkmark button
.
.
.
Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing
after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the product has finished the
initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.
If the heartbeat LED is off, the formatter might have a problem. Contact an HP-authorized service or
236 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Solve image quality problems
This section helps you define print quality problems and what to do to correct them. Often print quality
problems can be handled easily by making sure that the product is properly maintained, using paper
that meets HP specifications, or running a cleaning page.
Example print quality problems
Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate paper.
Use paper that meets HP paper specifications.
●
●
●
The surface of the paper is too rough. Use paper that meets HP paper specifications.
The printer driver setting or paper tray setting might be incorrect. Be sure that you have configured
the paper tray at the product control panel and have also selected the correct driver setting for the
paper that you are using.
The print mode might be set incorrectly, or the paper might not meet recommended specifications.
●
●
The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion. Use only
transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet products.
The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a different source
or from an unopened ream of paper.
●
●
●
Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream
of paper.
The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic paper. If this
solves your problem, consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets
the specifications for this product.
Several optimize print modes can be used to address print quality issues. See Print Quality menu
●
Repetitive defects ruler
If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect. Place
the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect
indicates which component needs to be replaced.
ENWW
Solve image quality problems 237
(0)
(36mm)
(40mm)
(50mm)
(71mm)
(82mm)
(94mm)
(144mm)
(148mm)
36 mm
40 mm
Developer roller in an image drum.
The print quality defect will be in one of the four image drums (image drum).
Charge roller in an image drum.
The print quality defect will be spots or dots sometimes caused when feeding labels and will be in one of the four
image drums (image drum).
50 mm
71 mm
82 mm
94 mm
Transfer 1 roller in the transfer unit (transfer kit).
Transfer 2 roller in the roller kit (transfer kit).
Tension in the transfer unit (transfer kit).
Image drum.
The print quality defect will be in one of the four image drums (image drum).
238 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
144 mm
148 mm
Pressure roller in the fuser (fuser kit).
Fusing roller in the fuser (fuser kit).
To identify if the image drum is the problem, insert an image drum from another HP Color LaserJet
CP6015 series, if one is available, before ordering a new image drum.
If the defect repeats at 94.0 mm (3.75 inch) intervals, try replacing the image drum before replacing the
fuser.
Overhead transparency defects
Overhead transparencies might display any of the image quality problems that any other type of paper
could display, as well as defects specific to transparencies. In addition, because transparencies are
pliable while in the print path, they are subject to being marked by the paper-handling components.
NOTE: Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them.
On the printer driver’s Paper tab, select Transparency as the paper type. Also, make sure that
the tray is correctly configured for transparencies.
●
Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this product.
●
●
If transparencies are sticking together in the output bin, set MEDIA TEMP to REDUCED from the
Handle transparencies by the edges. Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots
and smudges.
●
●
●
●
Small, random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused by transparencies
sticking together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches.
If the selected colors are undesirable when printed, select different colors in the software program
or printer driver.
If you are using a reflective overhead projector, use a standard overhead projector instead.
Print quality problems associated with the environment
If the product is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions, verify that the printing environment is
Print quality problems associated with jams
Make sure that all paper is cleared from the paper path.
●
●
●
If the product recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the product.
The paper does not pass through the fuser, causing image defects to appear on subsequent
documents. Print two to three pages to clean the product.
Optimize and improve image quality
The following procedures can be used to solve most image quality problems.
ENWW
Solve image quality problems 239
Use supported paper
Using unsupported paper or other media in the product can cause a wide variety of image quality
Calibrate the product
Calibration is a product function that optimizes print quality. If you experience any image-quality
problems, calibrate the product.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT QUALITY, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight FULL CALIBRATE NOW, and then press the checkmark
button
.
If this calibration procedure does not fix the image quality problems, perform the following additional
calibration procedure.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT QUALITY, and then press the checkmark button
.
4. Press the down arrow to highlight CALIBRATE NEUTRALS, and then press the checkmark
button
.
Specify the correct paper type
NOTE: The steps can vary; this procedure is most common.
When you load a different paper type into the product, specify the type of paper you are using.
1. After loading the paper tray, specify the paper type at the control panel by using the control panel
in selecting the best paper type. The same type is then selected in the printer driver at the time of
printing.
2. When you send a print job from your computer, on the File menu in the software program, click
Print.
3. Select the product, and then click Properties or Preferences.
4. Select the Paper/Quality tab.
5. In the Paper Type drop-down box, select More... and then select the paper type that best matches
the paper that is loaded in the product.
If you are using the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 PCL 6 printer driver, select the General Everyday
Printing shortcut and select Paper Type. If you are using the HP Universal Printing PS driver,
select the Paper/Quality tab and then select Paper Type.
240 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
6. Select the paper type that best matches the paper that is loaded in the product.
Use the table below to help select the best type in the driver. The table maps the default settings
for specific paper types to the types that are listed in the driver and on the product control panel.
For example, if you are using glossy paper that is 125 g/m2, the type that would be selected in the
printer driver is XHVY Glossy 131-175 g/m2.
Standard paper types and weights
Paper types that can be selected from the printer
driver and control panel
Normal
Unspecified
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
Heavy 3
Glossy 1
Glossy 2
Glossy 3
Gloss Film
OHT
Light 1 60-74 g/m2
Normal 75-90 g/m2
Heavy 1 91-120 g/m2
Heavy 2 121-163 g/m2
Heavy 3 164-220 g/m2
Gloss 1 91-120 g/m2
Gloss 2 121-160 g/m2
Gloss 3 161-220 g/m2
Gloss Film
Light 60-74 g/m2
Intermediate 85-95 g/m2
Heavy 111-130 g/m2
Extra Heavy 131-175 g/m2
Cardstock 176-220 g/m2
HVY Glossy 111-130 g/m2
XHVY Glossy 131-175 g/m2
Card Glossy 176-220 g/m2
HP Tough Paper
OHT
Color Laser Transparency
Labels
Label
Envelope
Envelope
Envelope 2
Heavy Envelope
Designated 1 60-90 g/m2
Designated 2 >91 g/m2
Rough
Heavy Rough
Clean the fuser
Run the device cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and paper particles that can sometimes
accumulate. Accumulation of toner and particles can cause specks to appear on the front or back side
of your print jobs.
HP recommends that you use the cleaning page when there is a print quality issue.
ENWW
Solve image quality problems 241
A CLEANING message appears on the product control panel display while the cleaning is taking place.
In order for the cleaning page to work correctly, print the page on copier-grade paper (not bond, heavy,
or rough paper). A blank page will be printed when the task is complete. Discard the page.
Create and use the cleaning page
1. Press MENU.
2. Press the up arrow or down arrow
/
to select CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press the
checkmark button
.
3. Press the up arrow or down arrow / to scroll to PRINT QUALITY, and then press the checkmark
button
.
4. Press the up arrow or down arrow
/
to scroll to PROCESS CLEANING PAGE, and then press
the checkmark button
.
5. Discard the printed page. The task is complete.
Respond to control panel error messages
If you see a 54.ERROR <XX> message in the event log, you might need to perform some maintenance
on the product to avoid more errors and to solve print quality problems.
1. Open and then close the right door of the product to log a 54.ERROR <XX> as the latest event in
the event log.
2. Press Menu.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight INFORMATION, and then press the checkmark button
4. Press down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press the checkmark button
.
.
5. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG, and then press the checkmark button
.
6. Find the most recent event in the log.
If the event is a 54.OE.01 MEDIA SENSOR event, a service technician needs to replace the
registration second transfer assembly. Contact HP Support at www.hp.com/support/
cljcp6015 and provide them with this error code.
●
●
●
If the event is a 54.OE.02 MEDIA SENSOR event, you need to replace the product transfer
code.
If the event is a 54.OE.03 MEDIA SENSOR event, you need to clean the registration second
transfer assembly and the media sensor using the following procedure.
242 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
4. Clean the media sensor with the cleaning brush.
5. Close the transfer access panel, and replace the cleaning brush in its holder.
6. Close the right door.
244 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Use manual print modes
Try the following manual print modes to see if they solve the image quality problems. These options can
be found in the Optimize sub-menu under the control panel Print Quality menu. See Print Quality menu
PAPER CURL: The REDUCED setting decreases full speed to 10 PPM (instead of 40 PPM) and
3/4 speed to 7.5 PPM (instead of 30 PPM) in order to reduce paper curl problems.
●
●
●
PRE-ROTATION: Set this feature to ON if horizontal streaks appear on pages. Using this feature
increases the warmup time for the product.
FUSER TEMP: If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or
on the following page, you should first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode settings are
correct for the type of paper you are using. If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs,
set the Fuser Temp feature to one of the Alternate settings . Try the ALTERNATE 1 setting first
and see if it solves the problem. If you continue to see the problem, try ALTERNATE 2 and then
ALTERNATE 3. With the ALTERNATE 2 and ALTERNATE 3 settings you may see an extra delay
between jobs.
TRAY 1: Set the mode to ALTERNATE if you are seeing marks on the back side of the paper when
printing from Tray 1. This increases the frequency of the cleaning cycle.
●
●
●
GLOSS MODE: Set this feature to HIGH for glossy print jobs, such as photos, if you notice the
gloss finish decreasing after the first page is printed.
LIGHT MEDIA: Set this feature to ON if you are frequently seeing Fuser Delay Jam or Fuser Wrap
Jam messages, especially when printing on light-weight paper or on jobs with heavy toner
coverage.
MEDIA TEMP: Set this feature to REDUCED if you are having problems with paper sticking
together in the output bin.
●
●
ENVIRONMENT: Optimizes performance in extreme low temperature environments. Set this
feature to ON if the product is operating in a low-temperature environment and you are having
problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image.
LINE VOLTAGE: Optimizes performance in low-voltage conditions. Set this feature to ON if the
product is operating in a low-voltage environment and you are having problems with print quality
such as blisters in the printed image.
●
●
CLEANING FREQUENCY: If you are seeing defects in the printed output that repeat at 38 mm
(1.5 inch) intervals, set this feature to ALTERNATE. This feature increases the frequency at which
the C roller is cleaned. Setting this feature to ALTERNATE might also reduce printing speed and
increase the frequency of consumable replacement.
D-BLADE BIAS: If you are seeing short white vertical lines in the printed output, set this feature
to ALTERNATE. The ALTERNATE setting might also cause dark spots in the printed output, so
be sure to test this setting on a few print jobs.
●
WASTE BIN: Set this feature to ALTERNATE if you are seeing lengthwise toner streaks in your
printed output, especially in jobs with low toner coverage.
●
●
●
BACKGROUND: Turn this feature on if pages are printing with a shaded background. Using this
feature can reduce gloss levels.
HEAVY MODE: Sets speed to 30 PPM or 24 PPM in order to better feed heavy paper.
ENWW
Solve image quality problems 245
PRE-ROTATION: Turn this feature ON if horizontal streaks appear on pages. Using this feature
increases the warm-up time for the device.
●
●
TRACKING CONTROL: Improves color stability by adjusting the bias voltage. Make sure this mode
is set to ON.
Print-quality-troubleshooting pages
Use the built-in print-quality-troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press the checkmark button
.
3. Press the down arrow to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING, and then press the checkmark
button to print the pages.
The product returns to the READY state after printing the print-quality-troubleshooting pages. Follow
the instructions on the pages that print out.
246 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Performance problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Pages print but are totally blank.
The sealing tape might still be in the print Verify that the sealing tape has been
cartridges.
completely removed from the print
cartridges.
The document might contain blank
pages.
Check the document that you are printing
to see if content appears on all of the
pages.
The product might be malfunctioning.
To check the product, print a
Configuration page.
Pages print very slowly.
Heavier media types can slow the print
job.
Print on a different type of media.
Complex pages can print slowly.
Proper fusing may require a slower print
speed to ensure the best print quality.
If printed in large batches, narrow paper Print on a different paper size or in
can slow the print job. smaller batches.
Pages did not print.
The product might not be pulling media Make sure paper is loaded in the tray
correctly.
correctly.
If the problem persists, you might need
to replace the pickup rollers and the
separation pad. See Customer support
The media is jamming in the device.
The USB cable might be defective or
incorrectly connected.
Disconnect the USB cable at both
ends and reconnect it.
●
●
●
Try printing a job that has printed in
the past.
Try using a different USB cable.
Other devices are running on your
computer.
The product might not share a USB port.
If you have an external hard drive or
network switchbox that is connected to
the same port as the product, the other
device might be interfering. To connect
and use the product, you must
disconnect the other device or you must
use two USB ports on the computer.
ENWW
Performance problems 247
Solve network connectivity problems
If the product is having problems communicating with the network, use the information in this section to
resolve the problem.
Solve network printing problems
NOTE: HP recommends that you use the product CD to install and set up the product on a network.
Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the product's RJ45 connector.
●
●
Make sure that the Link LED on the formatter is lit. See Understand lights on the formatter
Make sure that the I/O card is ready. Print a configuration page (see Information pages
on page 138). If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a configuration page also prints
a second page that shows the network settings and status.
●
NOTE: The HP Jetdirect print server supports various network protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX,
Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, and DCL/LLC). Make sure that the correct protocols and network
parameters are set correctly.
On the HP Jetdirect configuration page, verify the following items for your protocol:
Under HP Jetdirect Configuration, the status is "I/O Card Ready."
Protocol status is "Ready."
◦
◦
◦
◦
An IP address is listed.
The configuration method (Config by:) is listed correctly. See the network administrator if you
are not sure which method is correct.
Try printing the job from another computer.
●
●
To verify that a product works with a computer, use a USB cable to connect it directly to a computer.
You will have to reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed
correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist.
Contact your network administrator for assistance.
●
248 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Verify communication over the network
If the HP Jetdirect configuration page shows an IP address for the product, use this procedure to verify
that you can communicate with the product over the network.
1. Windows: Click Start, click Run, and then type
cmd
. An MS-DOS command prompt opens.
-or-
Mac: Click Applications, click Utilities, and then open the Terminal application. The terminal
window opens.
2. Type
ping
followed by the IP address. For example, type
ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
where "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IPv4 address that is shown on the HP Jetdirect configuration
page. If the product is communicating over the network, the response is a list of replies from the
product.
3. Verify that the IP address is not a duplicate address on the network by using the address resolution
protocol (arp -a) command. At the prompt, type
arp -a
. Find the IP address in the list and compare its physical address to the hardware address that is
listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page in the section called HP Jetdirect Configuration. If the
addresses match, all network communications are valid.
4. If you cannot verify that the product is communicating over the network, contact the network
administrator.
ENWW
Solve network connectivity problems 249
Product software problems
Problem
Solution
A printer driver for the product is not visible in the Printer folder
Reinstall the product software.
●
NOTE: Close any applications that are running. To
close an application that has an icon in the system tray,
right-click the icon, and select Close or Disable.
Try plugging the USB cable into a different USB port on
the computer.
●
●
An error message was displayed during the software
installation
Reinstall the product software.
NOTE: Close any applications that are running. To
close an application that has an icon in the task bar, right-
click the icon, and select Close or Disable.
Check the amount of free space on the drive where you
are installing the product software. If necessary, free up
as much space as you can, and reinstall the product
software.
●
If necessary, run the Disk Defragmenter, and reinstall the
product software.
●
●
●
The product is in Ready mode, but nothing prints
Print a Configuration page, and verify the product
functionality.
Verify that all of the cables are correctly seated and within
specifications. This includes the USB and power cables.
Try a new cable.
250 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Solve common Macintosh problems
This section lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS X.
Table 12-2 Problems with Mac OS X
The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause
Solution
The product software might not have been installed or was installed Make sure that the product PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj
incorrectly.
, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that
you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software. See the getting
started guide for instructions.
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.
Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj
, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide
for instructions.
The product name, IP address, or Rendezvous/Bonjour host name does not appear in the product list in the Print Center or Printer
Setup Utility.
Cause
Solution
The product might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the product is on,
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The wrong connection type might be selected.
Make sure that USB, IP Printing, or Rendezvous/Bonjour is selected,
depending on the type of connection that exists between the product
and the computer.
The wrong product name, IP address, or Rendezvous/Bonjour host Print a configuration page in order to check the product name, IP
name is being used.
address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address,
or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the
product name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print
Center or Printer Setup Utility.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected product in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause
Solution
The product might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the product is on,
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The product software might not have been installed or was installed Make sure that the product PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
incorrectly.
<lang>.lproj
ENWW
Solve common Macintosh problems 251
Table 12-2 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)
The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected product in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause
Solution
, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that
you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software. See the getting
started guide for instructions.
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.
Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj
, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide
for instructions.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted.
Cause
Solution
The print queue might be stopped.
Restart the print queue. Open print monitor and select Start Jobs.
The wrong product name or IP address is being used. Another
Print a configuration page in order to check the product name, IP
product with the same or similar name, IP address, or Rendezvous address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address,
host name might have received your print job.
or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the
product name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print
Center or Printer Setup Utility.
An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.
Cause
Solution
This problem occurs with some programs.
Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to
the product before printing.
●
●
Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.
You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.
Cause
Solution
This error occurs when the software for USB products is not
installed.
When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple USB
Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this
software is available from the Apple Web site.
252 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Table 12-2 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)
When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.
Cause
Solution
This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware
component.
Software troubleshooting
Check that your Macintosh supports USB.
●
●
Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS X v10.1
or later.
Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software
from Apple.
●
Hardware troubleshooting
Check that the product is turned on.
●
●
●
●
Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.
Check that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.
Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing
power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the
chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host
computer.
Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are
connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices
from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on
the host computer.
●
NOTE: The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.
ENWW
Solve common Macintosh problems 253
254 Chapter 12 Solve problems
ENWW
Order parts, accessories, and supplies
Several methods are available for ordering parts, supplies, and accessories:
●
●
●
●
Order directly from HP
You can obtain the following items directly from HP:
Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center.
●
●
Order through service or support providers
To order a part or accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are
connected to a network)
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server.
1. In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address or host name of the device. The status
window opens.
2. In the Other links area, double-click Order Supplies. This provides a URL for a site from which
you can purchase consumables.
3. Select the part numbers that you want to order, and follow the instructions on the screen.
Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software
HP Easy Printer Care software is a printer management tool designed to make printer configuration,
monitoring, supplies ordering, troubleshooting, and updating as simple and efficient as possible. For
256 Appendix A Supplies and accessories
ENWW
Part numbers
Ordering information and availability might change during the life of the product.
Accessories
Item
Description
Part number
HP Color LaserJet 1 x 500 Paper Feeder 500-sheet paper feeder and cabinet
CB473A
HP Color LaserJet 3 x 500 Paper Feeder 3-drawer (500 sheets each) paper feeder CB474A
and cabinet
HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker Accessory
3-bin stapler/stacker with output
accessory bridge unit
Q6998A
HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker or HP Booklet 5000-staple replacement cartridge
Maker/Finisher staple cartridge (upper
C8091A
cartridge on HP Booklet Maker/Finisher)
HP Booklet Maker/Finisher Accessory
Booklet maker finisher with output
accessory bridge unit
Q6999A
CC383A
HP Booklet Maker/Finisher saddle-stitch 2000-staple replacement cartridge
staple cartridge (lower cartridge)
Print cartridges
Item
Description
Part number
HP Color LaserJet black print cartridge
HP Color LaserJet cyan print cartridge
16,500-page black cartridge
CB380A
CB381A
CB382A
CB383A
17,000-page cyan cartridge
HP Color LaserJet yellow print cartridge 17,000-page yellow cartridge
HP Color LaserJet magenta print
cartridge
17,000-page magenta cartridge
Image drums
Item
Description
Part number
HP Color LaserJet black image drum
HP Color LaserJet cyan image drum
HP Color LaserJet yellow image drum
HP Color LaserJet magenta image drum
CB384A
CB385A
CB386A
CB387A
Maintenance kits
Item
Description
Part number
Image fuser kit
110 volt
CB457A
ENWW
Part numbers 257
Item
Description
Part number
Image fuser kit
Roller kit
220 volt
CB458A
CB459A
CB463A
Image transfer kit
Cables and interfaces
Item
Description
Part number
Enhanced I/O (EIO) card
HP Jetdirect 635n IPv6/IPsec Print
Server
J7961G
USB cable
2-meter standard USB-compatible
device connector
C6518A
258 Appendix A Supplies and accessories
ENWW
B Service and support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series product
One-year limited warranty
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials
and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects
during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.
Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase,
for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If
HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute
its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a
reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of
the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to
incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b)
software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation
outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or
maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER
WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or
provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might
not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from
country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/
region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The
level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function
of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory
reasons.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
ENWW
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 259
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
260 Appendix B Service and support
ENWW
Print cartridge and image drum limited warranty
statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or
tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear
from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of
the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace
products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
ENWW
Print cartridge and image drum limited warranty statement 261
Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit
Limited Warranty Statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer
provides a low-life indicator on the control panel.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered
with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside
of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary
use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of
the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove
to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
262 Appendix B Service and support
ENWW
Customer self repair warranty service
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and
allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP
identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to
you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is
mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs
of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for
Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no
additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day
delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography
permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will
help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether
a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP,
you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business
days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping
material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a
customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to
be used.
ENWW
Customer self repair warranty service 263
Customer support
Get telephone support, free during your warranty period, for
your country/region
Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the
Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and
problem description ready.
Get 24-hour Internet support
Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer
Order supplies and paper
Order genuine HP parts or accessories
Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements
264 Appendix B Service and support
ENWW
Availability of support and service
Around the world, HP provides a variety of service and support options for purchase. Availability of these
programs will vary depending upon your location.
HP maintenance agreements
HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs.
Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services may vary by area.
Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you.
On-site service agreements
To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs, HP has on-site service agreements
with three response times:
Priority onsite service
This agreement provides 4-hour service response to your site for calls made during normal HP business
hours.
Next-day onsite service
This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request. Extended
coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP’s designated service zones are available on most on-
site agreements (for additional charges).
Weekly (volume) on-site service
This agreement provides scheduled weekly on-site visits for organizations with many HP products. This
agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products, including printers, plotters,
computers, and disk drives.
ENWW
Availability of support and service 265
266 Appendix B Service and support
ENWW
Physical specifications
Table C-1 Product dimensions
Product
Height
Depth
Width
Weight1
HP Color LaserJet CP6015n
580 mm
(22.8 inches)
635 mm (25 inches) 704 mm
(27.7 inches)
86.2 kg (190.1 lb)
HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn
HP Color LaserJet CP6015de
HP Color LaserJet CP6015x
580 mm
(22.8 inches)
635 mm (25 inches) 704 mm
(27.7 inches)
86.2 kg (190.1 lb)
86.2 kg (190.1 lb)
115.3 kg (254.3 lb)
119.6 kg (263.6 lb)
580 mm
(22.8 inches)
635 mm (25 inches) 704 mm
(27.7 inches)
972.8 mm
(38.3 inches)
635 mm (25 inches) 704 mm
(27.7 inches)
HP Color LaserJet CP6015xh
Without print cartridge
972.8 mm
(38.3 inches)
635 mm (25 inches) 704 mm
(27.7 inches)
1
Table C-2 Product dimensions, with all doors and trays fully opened
Product
Height
Depth
Width
HP Color LaserJet CP6015n
580 mm (22.8 inches)
1079.5 mm
(42.5 inches)
983 mm (38.7 inches)
983 mm (38.7 inches)
983 mm (38.7 inches)
983 mm (38.7 inches)
983 mm (38.7 inches)
HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn
HP Color LaserJet CP6015de
HP Color LaserJet CP6015x
HP Color LaserJet CP6015xh
580 mm (22.8 inches)
580 mm (22.8 inches)
1079.5 mm
(42.5 inches)
1079.5 mm
(42.5 inches)
972.8 mm (38.3 inches) 1079.5 mm
(42.5 inches)
972.8 mm (38.3 inches) 1079.5 mm
(42.5 inches)
268 Appendix C Product specifications
ENWW
Electrical specifications
WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This can damage the product and void the product warranty.
Table C-3 Power requirements (HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series)
Specification
110-volt models
230-volt models
Power requirements
100 to 127 volts (± 10%)
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
12.0 Amps
220 to 240 volts (± 10%)
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
6.0 Amps
Rated current
,
Printing3
Ready4
Sleep (220V)
Off
,
Sleep (110V)5
Product model
HP Color LaserJet CP6015n
1195 W
1195 W
207 W
18.9 W
(N/A)
21.5 watts
21.5 watts
0.1 W
0.2 W
HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn
(Europe)
207.5 W
HP Color LaserJet CP6015dn
(non-European countries/
regions)
1195 W
207.5 W
18.9 W
N/A
0.1 W
HP Color LaserJet CP6015de
HP Color LaserJet CP6015x
HP Color LaserJet CP6015xh
1195 W
1195 W
1200 W
50 W
18.9 W
18.9 W
19.4 W
N/A
0.1 W
0.1 W
0.1 W
208 W
211.4 W
21.5 watts
22 watts
1
2
3
4
5
6
Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages.
HP Color LaserJet CP6015 series printing speeds are 40 ppm for Letter and 41 ppm for A4 sizes.
Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 722 BTU/hour.
Default time from Ready mode to Sleep mode = 60 minutes.
Recovery time from Sleep mode = less than 125 seconds
ENWW
Electrical specifications 269
Acoustic specifications
Sound power level
Printing2
Declared per ISO 9296
LWAd= 6.8 Bels (A) [68 dB(A)]
LWAd= 5.8 Bels (A) [58 dB(A)]
Ready
Sound pressure level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing2
LpAm=52.7 dB (A)
Ready
LpAm=40.3 dB (A)
1
2
HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series speed is 40 ppm for A4 or Letter-sized paper in either full color or monochrome.
Configuration tested (HP Color LaserJet CP6015): Base model, simplex printing with A4 paper size.
270 Appendix C Product specifications
ENWW
Environmental specifications
Environmental condition
Recommended
Allowed
Storage/standby
Temperature (product and
print cartridge)
17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F)
10° to 30°C (50° to 86°F)
0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
Relative humidity
30% to 70% relative humidity 10% to 80% RH
(RH)
5% to 95%
N/A
Altitude
N/A
0 meters (0 feet) to 2500
meters (8000 feet)
ENWW
Environmental specifications 271
272 Appendix C Product specifications
ENWW
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
●
●
●
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
274 Appendix D Regulatory information
ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready and Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and
saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY STAR®
qualification status for this product, see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet. Qualified
products are also listed at:
Paper use
This product’s optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages
printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural
resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to
identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet print supplies
It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with HP Planet
Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print
cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return
multiple cartridges together rather than separately.
HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally
sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use, and recycling. When you
participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled
properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons
of waste from landfills. Please note that the cartridge will not be returned to you. Thank you for being
environmentally responsible!
NOTE: Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this
label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges, or warranty
returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges, please go to www.hp.com/recycle.
ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program 275
Return and recycling instructions
United States and Puerto Rico
The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more
HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.
Multiple returns (more than one cartridge)
1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.
2. Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg
(70 lb).
3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
OR
1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP LaserJet print cartridges).
2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
Single returns
1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.
2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box.
Shipping
For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, give the package to UPS during your next delivery
or pickup, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. For the location of your local UPS drop-off
center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com. If you are returning via USPS label, give the package
to a U.S. Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U.S. Postal Service Office. For more information, or to
Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates. Information subject to change without
notice.
Non-U.S. returns
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in
the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit www.hp.com/
recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper
according to EN12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This HP product contains a battery that may require special handling at end-of-life.
The battery contained in this product includes:
276 Appendix D Regulatory information
ENWW
Type
Carbon monofluoride lithium battery
Weight
0.8 grams
Formatter board
No
Location
User removable
This product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the control panel liquid crystal display that
might require special handling at end-of-life.
For recycling information you can visit www.hp.com/go/recycle or contact your local authorities or the
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the
European Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with
your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by
handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health
and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for
recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where
you purchased the product.
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner)
ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program 277
For more information
To obtain information about these environmental topics:
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
HP’s commitment to the environment
●
●
●
●
●
HP’s environmental management system
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
Material Safety Data Sheets
278 Appendix D Regulatory information
ENWW
Declaration of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC 17050–1 and EN 17050–1
Manufacturer's Name:
Hewlett-Packard Company
DoC#: BOISB-0601–00–rel. 1.0
11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Manufacturer's Address:
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
Accessories
HP Color LaserJet CP6015 series
CB 473A — 1x500-sheet input tray/stand
CB474A — 3x500-sheet input tray/stand
Q6999A — HP Booklet Maker/Finisher Accessory
Q6998A — 3–Bin Stapler/Stacker Accessory
Regulatory Model Number:2)
Product Options:
BOISB-0601-00
ALL
Toner Cartridges/Image Drums: CB380A, CB381A, CB382A, CB383A, CB384A, CB385A,
CB386A, CB387A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 + A11
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
CISPR 22:2005 / EN 55022:2006 – Class B1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000 +A2
EMC:
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1
EN 55024:1998+A1 + A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B/ ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1–2003
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and
carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name
or the product number(s).
Boise, Idaho , USA
February 1, 2008
For regulatory topics only:
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015, USA,
(Phone: 208-396-6000)
ENWW
Declaration of Conformity 279
Certificate of volatility
This is a statement regarding the volatility of customer data stored in memory. It also outlines how to
erase secure data from the product.
Types of memory
Volatile memory
The product utilizes volatile memory (64MB on the board and 512MB installed, for a total of 576MB) to
store customer data during the printing and copying process. When the product is powered off, this
volatile memory is erased.
Non-volatile memory
The product utilizes non-volatile memory (EEPROM) to store system control data and user preference
settings. No customer print or copy data is stored in non-volatile memory. This non-volatile memory can
be cleared and restored to factory defaults by performing a Cold Reset or Restore Factory Defaults from
the control panel.
Hard-disk-drive memory
The product contains an internal hard disk drive (40GB or larger) that may retain data after the product
is powered off. The product also may contain additional optional compact flash storage, or an external
EIO hard disk. Data stored in these devices may be from stored print jobs or third-party solutions. Some
of this data can be erased from the control panel of the product, but most must be erased using the
Secure Storage Erase features available within HP Web Jetadmin. Secure Storage Erase features
comply with U.S. Department of Defense (DOD) specification 5220–22.M.
280 Appendix D Regulatory information
ENWW
Safety statements
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has
implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the
device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot
escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified
in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
« Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »
VCCI statement (Japan)
Power cord statement (Japan)
EMI statement (Korea)
ENWW
Safety statements 281
Laser statement for Finland
LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series-laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1
laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn
laitteen ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren
utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP Color LaserJet CP6015 Series-kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia
kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö.
Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan
puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja
ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen
ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för
osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 785-800 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
282 Appendix D Regulatory information
ENWW
284 Appendix D Regulatory information
ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
3-bin mailbox
both sides, printing on
browser requirements
buttons, control panel
locating 12
exterior 169
fuser 241
clock
setting 148
color
capacity
500-sheet input tray
models including
500-sheet trays
adjusting 130
sRGB 135
A
accessories
ordering 256
address, printer
C
cabinet/stand
cable, USB
cables
canceling
Macintosh,
troubleshooting 251
advanced printing options
Windows 128
Attention light
printing 124
capacity
using 129
colored text
configuration page
Macintosh 64
3-bin mailbox
output bins
stapler/stacker
locating 12
cartridges
non-HP 150
ordering through embedded
recycling 275
storage 150
warranty 261
configurations, models
connectivity
USB 72
connectivity features
B
bins
capacities
locating
cartridges, print
selecting 102
booklet maker
chosen personality not
available 187
control panel
buttons 12
configuring 105
selecting 102
cleaning
locating
BOOTP 79
device 169
ENWW
Index 285
double-sided printing
error messages
messages, alphabetical
list 180
messages, numerical
list 180
errors
software 250
Ethernet cards
drivers
Macintosh,
troubleshooting 251
supported 51
European Union, waste
disposal 277
Explorer, versions supported
copies, number of
Windows 128
e
copying
universal 52
F
speed specifications
duplex printing
Windows 126
duplexer
first page
covers, locating
custom-size paper settings
Macintosh 65
customer support
locating
fonts
embedded Web server
links 144
online 264
duplexery
included
E
formatter cover, locating
fuser
EIO cards
D
Data light
locating 12
installing 162
density
settings 64
device status
cleaning 241
settings 36
G
embedded Web server
features 142
Enhanced I/O card
gateways 79
graphical display, control
panel 12
diagnostics
envelope feeder
envelopes
H
network 39
hard disk
DIMMs (dual inline memory
modules)
erasing 146
jams 234
HP Easy Printer Care
description 57
Environmental Product
installing 157
DLC/LLC 38
286 Index
ENWW
Internet Explorer, versions
supported
landscape orientation
downloading 57
opening 139
options 139
languages, printer
supported operating
systems 57
IP address
lights
BOOTP 79
Macintosh,
troubleshooting 251
overview 78
formatter 236
loading
loading media
using 139
HP Jetdirect print server
installing 162
lights 236
models including
HP Jetdirect print servers
installing 162
J
configuring 92
locking
jam-access lever, locating
jams
clearing 201
HP Web Jetadmin
envelopes 234
recovery 230
M
Macintosh
Jetadmin
Jetdirect print server
installing 162
problems,
troubleshooting 251
software 63
I
I/O configuration
image drums
replacing 154
lights 236
image fuser kit, 110 volt
image fuser kit, 220 volt
Information tab, embedded Web
server 143
models including
job storage
support 264
supported operating
systems 62
accessing 113
features 113
personal 115
stored 117
USB card,
troubleshooting 252
Macintosh driver settings
watermarks 66
input trays
configuring 19
install cartridge error
message 189
jobs
K
installing
interface ports
mailbox, 3-bin
keys, control panel
locating 12
capacity
L
included
locating
LAN-connector
ENWW
Index 287
Netscape Navigator, versions
supported
Networking tab, embedded Web
server 144
locating
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 277
media
selecting 102
output quality
custom-size, Macintosh
settings 65
troubleshooting 237
networks
P
memory
configuring 78
pages
connectivity features
DHCP 79
diagnostics 39
gateways 79
print servers included
settings 36
blank 247
features
pages per minute
pages per sheet
Windows 126
paper
permanent storage error
messages 185
menu map
covers, using different
paper 125
custom-size, Macintosh
settings 65
description 18
menus
first and last pages, using
d
diagnostics 43
hierarchy 15
load 92
information 18
printing 20
subnets 79
TCP/IP 78
Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP) 78
paper jams
resets 41
menus, control panel
I/O 36
O
locking 147
on/off switch, locating
operating environment
specifications 271
clearing 201
part numbers
Service 47
messages
memory 258
PCL drivers
ordering
universal 52
supplies through embedded
orientation
photos
models, features
multiple pages per sheet
Windows 126
N
n-up printing
Windows 126
output bins
capacities
288 Index
ENWW
portrait orientation
ports
private jobs
resolution
settings 64
specifications
deleting 115
printing 115
Windows 127
Resolution Enhancement
REt (Resolution Enhancement
technology) 64
included
locating
troubleshooting
Macintosh 252
PostScript Printer Description
(PPD) files
problem-solving
processor speed
product info
product status
proof and hold
retention, job
included 63
power
specifications 269
troubleshooting 176
power switch, locating
PPDs
accessing 113
features 113
personal 115
Windows 127
stored 117
included 63
print cartridge
managing 150
print cartridges
S
Q
quality
troubleshooting 237
scale documents
Macintosh 65
Windows 126
scanning
non-HP 150
ordering through embedded
recycling 275
R
speed specifications
Secur
Ready light
security
locating 12
replacing 152
recycling
locking control panel
menus 147
storage 150
warranty 261
print media
print on both sides
Windows 126
print paper
print quality
HP printing supplies returns and
regulatory statements
environmental product
laser statement for
Finland 282
security features
separator page
Windows 126
service
agreements 265
Services tab
Macintosh 68
settings
troubleshooting 237
print server card
installing 162
remote firmware update
(RFU) 170
repeating defects,
troubleshooting 237
printer languages
printer settings
configure 20
printing
Settings tab, embedded Web
server 143
resize documents
Macintosh 65
shortcuts 125
speed specifications
troubleshooting 247
Windows 126
ENWW
Index 289
stapler/stacker
capacity
replacing 151
status, viewing with embedded
status, viewing with HP Printer
Utility 64
sleep delay
disabling 108
enabling 108
time 108
configuring 105
selecting 102
staples
supplies status page
description 18
supplies, status
supply-status, Services tab
Macintosh 68
sleep settings
software
problems 250
supported operating
Windows 82
status
HP Printer Utility,
Macintosh 64
Windows 128
support
embedded Web server
links 144
storage cabinet
su
system requirements
storage, job
special media
accessing 113
features 113
T
TCP/IP
guidelines 91
special paper
personal 115
configuring 78
TCP/IP parameters, manual
TCP/IP settings
guidelines 91
specifications
stored 117
acoustic 270
electrical 269
store jobs
technical support
online 264
features
physical 267
Windows 127
storing
tests
speed specifications
standard output bin
storing jobs
network 39
toner
toner cartridges. See print
cartridges
capacity
locating
selecting 102
subnets 79
staple cartridges
empty, stop or continue
settings 112
supplies
counterfeit 150
top cover
staple options
locating 151
locating
Macintosh 67
Windows 126
stapler
non-HP 150
ordering 256
ordering through embedded
recycling 275
Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP) 78
tray 1
locating
trays
empty, stop or continue
settings 112
using 112
290 Index
ENWW
configure 99
USB port
troubleshooting 247
included
load 92
troubleshooting
Macintosh 252
V
trays, status
troubleshooting
W
wake time
changing 108
setting 108
checklist 176
warranty
control panel messages,
numerical 180
duplexing 235
extended 265
product 259
watermarks
error messages, alphabetical
list 180
Windows 126
error messages, numerical
list 180
Web browser requirements
Web Jetadmin
Web sites
quality 237
transparencies 233
HP Web Jetadmin,
downloading 145
Macintosh customer
support 264
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 277
TrueType fonts included
two-sided printing
Windows
Windows 126
supported operating
systems 50
typefaces
included
U
uninstalling Macintosh
software 62
usage page
description 18
ENWW
Index 291
292 Index
ENWW
© 2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*Q3931-90968*
*Q3931-90968*
Q3931-90968
Free Manuals Download Website
Golf course search by state
Email search by domain
Auto manuals search
TV manuals search
|
Toshiba Ras 13gavp E User Manual
Soleus Air Sg Wac 06ese User Manual
Philips Sbcsc464 User Manual
Lexmark Air Conditioner 9ez User Manual
HP ELITEBOOK 740 G2 User Manual
EMERSON FR966 User Manual
BLACK DECKER BPACT14H 02 User Manual
ASUS STRIX B250F User Manual
ACER EXTENSA 7220 User Manual
ACER ASPIRE M5811 User Manual